- Manuals
- Brands
- Honda
- Car
- Accord Coupe
- Owner's Manual
Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual PDF
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 0
Contents
This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owners manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owners manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.
This owners manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.
2 Safe Driving P. 25 For Safe Driving P. 26 Seat Belts P. 30 Airbags P. 37
2 Instrument Panel P. 65 Indicators P. 66 Gauges and Displays P. 79
2 Controls P. 83 Clock P. 84 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 86 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 107 Adjusting the Seats P. 125
2 Features P. 147 Audio System P. 148 Audio System Basic Operation P. 154, 176, 209 Customized Features P. 272 HomeLink Universal Transceiver* P. 310
2 Driving P. 389 Before Driving P. 390 Towing a Trailer P. 395 Refueling P. 445 Fuel Economy P. 447
2 Maintenance P. 449 Before Performing Maintenance P. 450 Maintenance MinderTM P. 453 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 481 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 495
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 501 Tools P. 502 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 503 Overheating P. 516 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 518
2 Information P. 527 Specifications P. 528 Identification Numbers P. 532 Emissions Testing P. 535 Warranty Coverages P. 537
Contents
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 1
Child Safety P. 50 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62 Safety Labels P. 63
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 97 Security System P. 101 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 104 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 108 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 133 Climate Control System P. 142
Audio Error Messages P. 262 General Information on the Audio System P. 268 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 312, 349 Compass* P. 387
When Driving P. 399 Braking P. 438 Parking Your Vehicle P. 442 Accessories and Modifications P. 448
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 457 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 473 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 483 Battery P. 492 Remote Transmitter Care P. 493 Cleaning P. 496
Engine Does Not Start P. 509 Jump Starting P. 512 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 515 Fuses P. 522 Emergency Towing P. 525
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 533 Reporting Safety Defects P. 534 Authorized Manuals P. 539 Customer Service Information P. 540
Quick Reference Guide P. 2
Safe Driving P. 25
Instrument Panel P. 65
Controls P. 83
Features P. 147
Driving P. 389
Maintenance P. 449
Handling the Unexpected P. 501
Information P. 527
Index P. 544
2
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 2
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
System Indicators (P 66)
Gauges (P 79)
Information Display (P 80)
Navigation System* () See Navigation System Manual
Audio System (P 154, 176, 209)
ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 109)
Rear Window Defogger (P 119)
Seat Heater Switches* (P 141)
Ignition Switch*1 (P 108)
ECON Button (P 418)
Heated Mirror Button* (P 119)
Climate Control System (P 142)
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System OFF) Button (P 431)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button* (P 428)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button* (P 434)
Hazard Warning Button Audio with Touch Screen* (P 177, 210)
Audio/Information Screen (P 155, 180, 212)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 3
(+ / (- / / Buttons (P 153)
SOURCE Button (P 153)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink System Voice Control Buttons (P 312, 349)
Navigation System Voice Control Buttons* (P 218), () See Navigation System Manual
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 122)
Cruise Control Buttons (P 419)
Wipers/Washers (P 117)
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 409, 413)
Brightness Control (P 118)
(Select/Reset) Knob (P 80)
Horn (Press an area around .) (Display) Button (P 155, 180, 212)
Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 409, 413)
LaneWatchTM*(P 432)
Fog Lights* (P 115)
Headlights/Turn Signals (P 113)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
4
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 4
Door Mirror Controls (P 124)
Passenger's Front Airbag (P 40)
Parking Brake (P 438)
Glove Box (P 135)
Rearview Mirror (P 123)
Hood Release Handle (P 459)
Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 96)
Power Window Switches (P 104)
Interior Fuse Box (P 523)
Driver's Front Airbag (P 40)
Trunk Main Switch* (P 99)
Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 446)
Trunk Release (P 97)
Shift Lever Automatic Transmission (CVT) (P 407)
Automatic Transmission (P 411)
Manual Transmission (P 415)
USB Port (P 149)
Auxiliary Input Jack (P 150)
Accessory Power Socket (P 138)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 5
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
Sun Visors
Vanity Mirrors
Map Lights (P 134)
Front Seat (P 125)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 55)
Side Curtain Airbags (P 46)
Grab Handle
Ceiling Light (P 133)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 57)
Rear Seat (P 132)
Accessory Power Socket (P 138)
Sunglasses Holder (P 140)
Moonroof Switch* (P 107)
Seat Belts (P 30)
Side Airbags (P 44)
Coat Hook (P 139)
* Not available on all models
Visual Index
6
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 6
Maintenance Under the Hood (P 457)
Windshield Wipers (P 117, 481)
Tires (P 483, 503)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 89)
Power Door Mirrors (P 124)
Headlights (P 113, 473)
How to Refuel (P 446)
High-Mount Brake Light (P 480)
Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 100)
Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 97)
Parking Lights (P 113, 478)
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 113, 477)
Fog Lights* (P 115, 476)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P 443)
Back-Up Lights (P 479)
Rear Camera (P 444)
Trunk Release Button* (P 98)
Brake/Taillights (P 479)
Rear Side Marker Lights (P 479)
Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 479)
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 7
Eco Assist System (P 418)
Ambient Meter Changes color to reflect your driving
style. Green: Fuel efficient driving Light green: Moderate acceleration/ deceleration White: Aggressive acceleration/ deceleration
The ambient meter color changes in accordance with your brake or accelerator pedal operation.
ECON Button (P 418) Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 75) Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
Ambient Meter
* Not available on all models
8
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 8
Safe Driving (P 25)
Airbags (P 37)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 50)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 62)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P 29)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P 30)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 9
Instrument Panel (P 65)
Canada
U.S.
Low Fuel Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Canada
U.S.
Washer Level Indicator*
System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
VSA OFF Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS IndicatorElectric Power
Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
Immobilizer System Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
System Indicators
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Gauges (P 79)/Information Display (P 80)/ System Indicators (P 66)
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
System Indicators
Temperature Gauge
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
Maintenance Minder Indicator
Smart Entry System Indicator*
Starter System Indicator*
ECON mode Indicator Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator*
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Indicator*
Light Control Indicator*
Door and Trunk Open Indicator
Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Canada
U.S.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/Gear position Indicator
Automatic transmission models
* Not available on all models
10
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 10
Controls (P 83)
Clock (P 84)
a Enter the Clock Adjustment screen. 2 Adjusting the Clock (P 84)
b Rotate to change hour, then press .
c Rotate to change minute, then press .
The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.
Models without navigation system
Models with navigation system
ENGINE START/STOP Button* (P 109)
Press the button to change the vehicles power mode.
Turn Signals (P 113)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Lights (P 113)
Wipers and Washers (P 117)
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring : Long Delay : Short Delay
MIST OFF INT: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 11
Steering Wheel (P 122)
To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
Unlocking the Doors from the Inside (P 94)
Pull either door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks the passengers door.
Trunk (P 97)
To unlock and open the trunk: Pull the trunk release. Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote. Press the trunk release button* on the
trunk lid.
Power Door Mirrors (P 124)
With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Trunk Release
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P 104)
With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, the passenger's window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), the passenger's window switch is disabled.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Power Window Lock Button
Window Switch
Indicator
* Not available on all models
12
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 12
Climate Control System (P 142)
Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system. Press the button to turn the system on or off. Press the button to defrost the windshield.
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 218) Models with navigation system
Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons
(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror*) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard vents.
AUTO Button
(On/Off) Button
(Recirculation) ButtonMODE Control Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 13
Features (P 147)
Audio Remote Controls (P 153)
(+ / (- Button Press to adjust the volume up/down.
SOURCE Button Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/ CD/XM*/HDD*/USB/iPod/Bluetooth/ Pandora*/AhaTM*/AUX.
/ Button Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.
CD/HDD*/USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.
(+ / (- / / Button
SOURCE Button
Audio System (P 154, 176, 209)
(P 154)Models with one display
Audio/Information Screen
BACK Button
FM/AM Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
Selector Knob
Button
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
CD Button AUX Button CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
SETTINGS Button
(Skip/Seek) Button
PHONE Button
MENU Button
DISP Button
* Not available on all models
14
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 14
*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
BACK Button
Selector Knob
(Tune Down) Icon*1
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
(P 176)Models with two displays
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
Button
Source*1
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
Presets*1
Phone*1
Clock/Screen*1
DISP Button
(Tune Up) Icon*1
More*1
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 15
*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
MENU Button
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
(P 209)Models with navigation system
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
Button
Source*1
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
Presets*1
(Tune Up) Icon*1
More*1
(Power) Button
(Tune Down) Icon*1
INFO Button
AUDIO Button
SETTINGS Button BACK Button
NAV Button
PHONE Button
15
16
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 16
Driving (P 389)
M Indicator
Shift Indicator
Manual Transmission (P 415)
Automatic Transmission (CVT) (P 407)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting
Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.
Neutral Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S) Better acceleration. Increased engine braking. Going up or down hills. 7-speed manual shift
mode can be used.
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.
Press the release button to move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
Reverse Used when reversing.
Drive Normal driving. 7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.
Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode (P 409) Allows you to manually shift
the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S Pulling a paddle shifter
changes the mode from automatic transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode.
The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode from automatic transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator.
Shift Lever
Release Button
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 17
Automatic Transmission (P 411)
Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting
Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked.
Neutral Transmission is not locked.
Drive (S) Sequential shift mode can be used.
Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P.
Press the release button to move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing the release button.
Reverse Used when reversing.
Drive Normal driving. D-paddle shift mode can be used
Shift Lever
Release Button
M Indicator
Gear Position Indicator
Shift Down (- Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter
Paddle Shifters (P 413) Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M indicator comes on.
The selected gear position is shown in the instrument panel.
Selected Gear Number
17
18
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 18
VSA OFF Button (P 431)
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To turn VSA on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P 419)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press the /SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 434)
Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling (P 445)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)
a Push the fuel fill door release handle.
b Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap.
c Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.
d After refueling, screw the cap back on until it clicks at least once.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 19
Maintenance (P 449)
Under the Hood (P 457)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid and clutch* fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.
b Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up the hood.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.
Lights (P 473)
Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P 481)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield.
Tires (P 483)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly. Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.
* Not available on all models
20
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 20
Handling the Unexpected (P 501)
Flat Tire (P 503)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.
Indicators Come On (P 518)
Identify the indicator and consult the owner's manual.
Engine Won't Start (P 509)
If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P 522)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Overheating (P 516)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P 525)
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 21
What to Do If
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q *1. Why?
The steering wheel may be locked. Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key*. Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button* at the same time.
The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 *1 and I cannot remove the key. Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
* Not available on all models
22
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 22
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors using a remote transmitter?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
The beeper sounds when: The key is left in the ignition switch*. The power mode* is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on.
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when: Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 23
California Proposition 65 Warning
Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
NOTICE
* Not available on all models
24
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 24
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:
Safety Labels - on the vehicle. Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.
3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 25
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ............. 26 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 28
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts........................ 30 Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags Airbag System Components............... 37 Types of Airbags ................................ 40 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40 Side Airbags....................................... 44
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 46 Airbag System Indicators.................... 47 Airbag Care ....................................... 49
Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 50 Safety of Infants and Small Children .......52 Safety of Larger Children ................... 60
Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 62
Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 63
25
26
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 26
For Safe Driving
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.
Important Safety Precautions Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.
Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
uuFor Safe Drivingu Important Safety Precautions Safe D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 27
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
27
28
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Safe D rivin
g
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks
Side Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
7
7
99
8
8
10
10
6
11
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features Safe D
rivin g
1Safety CheckList
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 70
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 29
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94
Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125
Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128
Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 50
Safety CheckList
29
30
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 30
Seat Belts
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.
3WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
About Your Seat Belts Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 57
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Safe D
rivin g
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 50
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 31
Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 before the driver's seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver does not fasten the belt before the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and the indicator will blink while driving until the driver's and front passengers seat belts are fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Seat Belt Reminder
Continued 31
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
32
Safe D rivin
g
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 32
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to- severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 33
Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Pull out slowly.
Correct Seated Posture.
Latch Plate
Buckle
33Continued
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
34
Safe D rivin
g
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
3WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 34
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.
Lap belt as low as possible
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Safe D
rivin g
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 35
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
35
36
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe D rivin
g
1Seat Belt Inspection
3WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 36
Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 37
Airbags
rivin g
8
11
Airbag System Components
6
7
8
9
8
8
8 810
12
37Continued
38
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 38
The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The driver's and front passenger's seat belts incorporate sensors that detect whether or not they are fastened.
fA driver's seat position sensor. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force.
gWeight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The front passenger's airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child).
h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kSafing Sensor
lA rollover sensor that detects whether the vehicle is about to roll over.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components Safe D
rivin g
1Important facts about your airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 39
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Important facts about your airbags
39
40
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags (SRS) Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple- threshold front airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 40
Types of Airbags Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs. Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Housing Locations
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 41
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Operation
How the Front Airbags Work
Continued 41
42
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 42
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a rollover. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Safe D
rivin g
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly: Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. Do not put any object under the passengers seat. Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.
Do not place any cover over the passenger side dashboard.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 497
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 43
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor.
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag inflates with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system has weight sensors.
Although we recommend against carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of a child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn off the passenger's front airbag.
Advanced Airbags
Drivers Seat Position Sensor
Passengers Seat Weight Sensors
43
44
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 44
Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seat- backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to- severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.
Housing Locations
Housing Location
Operation
When inflated
Side Airbag
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Safe D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 45
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.
When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
45
46
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe D rivin
g
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.
If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 46
Side Curtain Airbags The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Housing Locations
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Safe D
rivin g
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 47
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision. In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
Continued 47
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
48
Safe D rivin
g
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passengers seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as:
An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.
A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back.
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger's seat.
The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 48
When the passenger airbag off indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger's front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the front passengers weight sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 50
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on.
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S. Canada
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Safe D
rivin g
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 49
Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.
When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the drivers seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passengers seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
49
50
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 50
Child Safety
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.
3WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 63
3WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 51
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
51
52
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe D rivin
g
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturers instructions before installation.
3WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 37
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Infants
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the childs height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 53
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forward- facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Protecting Smaller Children
Continued 53
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
54
Safe D rivin
g
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 54
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owners manual for proper installation instructions.
Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Selecting a Child Seat
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 55
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.
Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
Flexible Type
55Continued
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
56
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 56
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 57
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 2 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
Continued 57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
58
Safe D rivin
g
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 58
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe D
rivin g
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is available.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 59
A tether anchorage point is provided behind each rear seating position. A child seat that is installed with a seat belt and comes with a tether can use the tether for additional security.
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage point and lift the cover.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs.
2. Remove the head restraint. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 129
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the anchor. u Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
5. Reinstall the head restraint. u Make sure to adjust the head restraint in
its highest position. 2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 129
Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
Cover
Anchor
Outer Position Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Center Position Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Rear outer seating positions
Rear center seating position
All positions
Rear center seating position
59
60
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe D rivin
g
1Safety of Larger Children
3WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 60
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat? Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm? Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs? Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Protecting Larger Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safe D
rivin g
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 61
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.
Booster Seats
Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
61
62
Safe D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.
3WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. The exhaust system may have been damaged. The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 63
Safety Labels
Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
Safe D rivin
g
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Doorjambs
U.S. models U.S. models only Dashboard
Canadian models
63
64
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 64
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 65
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 66 Information Display Warning and Information Messages...................... 77
Gauges and Displays Gauges.............................................. 79 Information Display............................ 80
65
66
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 66
Indicators
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off if the parking brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low. Comes on if there is a problem with the brake
system. The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
you drive with the parking brake not fully released.
Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on P. 520
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On P. 520
Brake System Indicator (Amber)
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with a component related to braking.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 67
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 518
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off either when the engine starts or after several seconds if the engine did not start. If readiness codes have not been set, it blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.
Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 535 Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 519
Charging System Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.
Comes on while driving - Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 518
67Continued
68
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 68
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Indicates the current shift lever position. 2 Shifting P. 407, 411
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator
Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is applied.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 409
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is applied.
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 413
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Automatic transmission models
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 69
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Transmission Indicator*
Blinks if the transmission system has a problem. Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
Seat Belt Reminder Indicator
Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger has fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 31
Low Fuel Indicator
Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem with the ABS.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 440
69Continued* Not available on all models
70
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 70
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Supplemental Restraint System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA is active. Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA
system or hill start assist system.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 430
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) OFF Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA. 2 VSA On and Off P. 431
Door and Trunk Open Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if either door or the trunk is not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if either door or the trunk is opened while driving.
Goes off when both doors and the trunk are closed.
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 71
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 520
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires pressures are determined to
be significantly low. - The system has not been calibrated.
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 434
Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.
Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
The turn signal indicators blink when you operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both indicators and all turn signals blink at the same time.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 477, 479
71Continued
72
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 72
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
High Beam Indicator
Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.
Lights On Indicator
Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.
If you remove the key from the ignition switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
Fog Light Indicator*
Comes on when the fog lights are on.
Immobilizer System Indicator
Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
Security System Alarm Indicator
Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. 2 Security System Alarm P. 101
Indicator
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 73
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you have customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the FCW system.
Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks when the system detects a likely collision with a vehicle in front of you. The beeper sounds.
Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).
Comes on when the FCW system shuts itself off.
Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too high. The system activates when the temperature inside the system cools down.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 424
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 424
2 Automatic shutoff P. 424
73Continued* Not available on all models
74
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 74
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the LDW system.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks when your vehicle is too close to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.
Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to keep your vehicle within the lane lines.
Comes on when the LDW system shuts itself off.
Stays on - The temperature inside the LDW camera is too high. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 LDW Camera P. 427
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera.
2 LDW Camera P. 427
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu In
stru m
en t Pan
el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 75
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
ECON Mode Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you press the ECON button. 2 ECON Button P. 418
CRUISE MAIN Indicator
Comes on when you press the CRUISE button. 2 Cruise Control P. 419
CRUISE CONTROL Indicator
Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control P. 419
Washer Level Indicator*
Comes on when the washer fluid gets low. Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 472
Maintenance Minder Indicator
Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 453
Smart Entry System Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system or push button starting system.
Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
75Continued* Not available on all models
76
uu Indicatorsu
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 76
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Starter System Indicator*
Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the starter system has a problem.
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Light Control Indicator*
Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system or low beam headlights*.
Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on manually and have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu Information Display Warning and Information Messages
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 77
Information Display Warning and Information Messages The following messages appear only on the information display.
In stru
m en
t Pan el
Message Condition Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. 2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 519
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the battery.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
77Continued
78
uu Indicatorsu Information Display Warning and Information Messages
In stru
m en
t Pan el
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 78
Message Condition Explanation
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after moving the shift lever to (P .
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Appears when the steering wheel is locked. Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door.
Appears when the smart entry remotes battery becomes weak.
Replace the battery as soon as possible. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 493
Models with smart entry system
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 79
Gauges and Displays
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
E
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 516
Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Speedometer
Tachometer
Fuel Gauge
Temperature Gauge
79
80
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the knob, the information display changes as follows:
Some of the items on the information display also appear on the audio/information screen. They also change along with the information display changes while the fuel consumption is shown.
Instant Fuel Economy, Odometer, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Range, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A, Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Average Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B, Outside Temperature
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 80
Information Display The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.
Switching the Display
Select/Reset Knob
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display In
stru m
en t Pan
el
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.
1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 81
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 453
Odometer
Trip Meter
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Engine Oil Life
Continued 81
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
82
In stru
m en
t Pan el
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 82
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to 5F or 3C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display. u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5F to +5F (U.S.) or -3C to +3C (Canada). 3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown. u The adjustment is complete.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Outside Temperature
Range
* Not available on all m
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 83
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock .................................................... 84 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 86 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*......................................88
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................... 94
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ............ 96 Opening and Closing the Trunk......... 97 Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 101 Security System Alarm...................... 101
Opening and Closing the Windows ...104 Opening and Closing the Moonroof* ...107
odels
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Ignition Switch*............................... 108 ENGINE START/STOP Button*........... 109 Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ................................... 112
Turn Signals ..................................... 113 Light Switches.................................. 113 Fog Lights* ...................................... 115 Daytime Running Lights ................... 116 Wipers and Washers ........................ 117 Brightness Control ........................... 118 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button ........................................... 119
Driving Position Memory System* .... 120 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 122
Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 123 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 124
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 125 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items ................................................ 133
Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control .... 142 Synchronized Mode ......................... 144 Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 145
83
84
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 84
Clock
1Adjusting the Clock
The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 272
You can turn the clock display on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 272
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment. 3. Rotate to change hour, then press . 4. Rotate to change minute, then press .
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Adjusting the Time
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock C
o n
tro ls
1Using the SETTINGS button
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then press the (6 (Reset) button.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets forward or backward. Example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 1:53 will reset to 2:00
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 85
Using the SETTINGS button 1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks. 2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time. 3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.
Using the audio with touch screen 1. Select . 2. Select Clock. 3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
/ . 4. Select 12H or 24H. 5. Press Set to set the time.
Models with one display
CLOCK (SETTINGS) Button
(6 (Reset) Button
(4 (Hour) Button
(5 (Minute) Button
Models with two displays
3 4
85
86
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 86
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101
The keys contain precision electronics. Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to the electronics: Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity. Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. Keep the keys away from liquids. Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.
Key Types and Functions This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the key to start and stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk. You can also use the remote transmitter or smart entry system* to lock and unlock the doors and to open the trunk.
Smart entry remote*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built- in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks.
Master Keys
Master Key* Smart Entry Remote*
Built-in Key
Release Knob
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions C
o n
tro ls
1Valet Key*
When you need to leave a key with a third party, leave the valet key.
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 87
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and lock and unlock driver's door.
Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.
Valet Key*
Gray
Key Number Tag
87* Not available on all models
88
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
C o
n tro
ls
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remotes battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 88
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 272
If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you press the unlock button. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 133
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter or smart entry system only when the power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 89
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, both doors
lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
Using the Remote Transmitter
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
89Continued
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
90
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 493
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 90
Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice: u The passengers door unlocks.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle after two seconds of locking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 493
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 91
When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.
Locking the doors and the trunk Press the door lock button on either door. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; both doors and the trunk lock; and the security system sets.
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
Door Lock Button
Continued 91* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
92
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be customized.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 92
Unlocking the doors and the trunk Grab the drivers door handle: u The drivers door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice. Grab the passengers door handle: u Both doors and the trunk unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. 2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 98
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside C
o n
tro ls
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, the passengers door locks at the same time. When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the passengers door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 272
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, the passengers door locks at the same time. Make sure you have the key in your hand before locking the door to prevent it from being locked in the vehicle.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 93
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Locking the driver's door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
Locking the passenger's door Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
Lockout prevention system The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Lock
Unlock
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
93
94
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, the passengers door locks at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 94
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.
Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.
Using the Lock Tab
To Unlock
Lock TabTo Lock
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside C
o n
tro ls
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
The inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 95
Pull the inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the drivers door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.
To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the drivers door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the audio/information screen.
Unlocking Using the Inner Handle
Inner Handle
Continued 95
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
96
C o
n tro
ls
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the master lock switch, the passengers door locks/ unlocks at the same time.
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 96
Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock both doors.
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Drive lock mode Both doors lock when the vehicles speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Drivers door open mode Both doors unlock when the drivers door is opened.
Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Unlock
Master Door Lock Switch
To Lock
Auto Door Locking
Auto Door Unlocking
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 97
Opening and Closing the Trunk
o n
tro ls
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62
Using the Trunk Opener Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk Release
97Continued
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*
98
C o
n tro
ls
1Locking the trunk opener
If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.
Models without smart entry system
1Using the Trunk Release Button*
Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
A person who is not carrying the smart entry remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.
Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the trunk cannot be closed.
Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk lid when closing it.
Do not place the smart entry remote around the rear seat when closing the trunk.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 98
Locking the trunk opener You can lock the trunk release with the master key* or the built-in key*.
Using the Trunk Release Button*
Press the release button on the trunk lid after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the smart entry remote. u The beeper will sound.
Trunk Release Button
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter C
o n
tro ls
1Trunk Main Switch*
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote by sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a valet key.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 99
Using the Remote Transmitter Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.
Trunk Main Switch*
The trunk main switch disables the trunk release button on the remote transmitter and the trunk release button on the trunk lid to protect luggage in the trunk. 1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down. 2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box. 3. Lock the glove box. 4. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 97
Trunk Button
ON
OFF
Main Switch
99* Not available on all models
100
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
C o
n tro
ls
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 100
Emergency Trunk Opener The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.
Lever
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 101
Security System
o n
tro ls
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the ignition key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system deactivates.
Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button. Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.
Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.
When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
101Continued
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
102
C o
n tro
ls
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: Unlocking the door with the lock tab. Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another device to it.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 102
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch. The hood and trunk are closed. Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key, remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The security system indicator goes off at the same time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm C
o n
tro ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 103
The panic button on the remote transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: The horn sounds. Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Panic Mode
Panic Button
103
104
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 104
Opening and Closing the Windows
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Opening either door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The drivers window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3WARNING Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and close both windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passengers window from the passenger's side.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when children are in the vehicle.
Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
On Off
Power Window Lock Button
IndicatorDrivers Window Switch
Passengers Window Switch
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows C
o n
tro ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 105
To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.
To open: Press the unlock button twice within 10 seconds and hold it down for the second time. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function*
Close
Open
Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote*
Unlock Button
105Continued* Not available on all models
106
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 106
To open: Unlock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there. To close: Lock the drivers door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the lock direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/ moonroof at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.
Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key*
Close
Open
* Not available on all models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 107
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
o n
tro ls
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch off. Opening either door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
3WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.
Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Opening/Closing the Moonroof
Open
Close Tilt
107* Not available on all models
108
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 108
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
1Ignition Switch*
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out. If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.
3WARNING Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
All models
Ignition Switch*
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C
o n
tro ls
1ENGINE START/STOP Button*
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper sounds.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 510
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.
Operating Range
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 109
ENGINE START/STOP Button*
Changing the Power Mode
Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off. The steering wheel is locked. The power to all electrical components is turned off.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P.
Shift to (P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without pressing the clutch pedal
Without pressing the brake pedal
ACCESSORY Indicator in the button is on. Indicator in the button blinks (from ON to ACCESSORY). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.
ON Indicator in the button is on. All electrical components can be used.
Indicator Indicator
109Continued* Not available on all models
110
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 110
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode: The steering wheel does not lock. You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
Automatic Power Off
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button* C
o n
tro ls
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the systems operational range, and the drivers door is closed, the warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the systems operational range.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 111
If you open the drivers door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds.
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/ and outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it to be within its operational range.
When the power mode is in ON If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and the drivers door is closed, warning buzzers sound from both inside and outside the vehicle. A warning message on the information display notifies the driver inside that the remote is out.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.
Power Mode Reminder
Smart Entry Remote Reminder
111
112
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 112
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch Position
LOCK (0) (with/without the key)
ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)
Without Smart Entry System
Engine is turned off and power is shut down.
The steering wheel is locked.
No electrical components can be used.
Engine is turned off. Some electrical
components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.
Normal key position while driving.
All electrical components can be used.
Use this position to start the engine.
The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.
Power Mode VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
ACCESSORY ON START
With Smart Entry System and ENGINE START/STOP Button
Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and
power is shut down. The steering wheel is
locked. No electrical
components can be used.
Indicator-On or blinking Engine is turned off. Some electrical
components such as the audio system and the accessory power socket can be operated.
Indicator- On (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running) All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off The mode automatically
returns to ON after the engine starts.
Indicator is: On Off
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals C
o n
tro ls
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 72
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 113
Turn Signals The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. One-touch turn signal When you lightly push up or down and release the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the position of the ignition switch*1. High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Right Turn
Left Turn
Manual Operation
High Beams
Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
113Continued
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
114
C o
n tro
ls
1Automatic Lighting Control
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at
MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
Light Sensor
Bright
Dark
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 114
Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting. 2 Customized Features P. 272
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic Lighting Control
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights* C
o n
tro ls
1Headlight Integration with Wipers*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.
1Fog Lights*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator* P. 72
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 115
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door. u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 272
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Headlight Integration with Wipers*
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Fog Light Switch
115* Not available on all models
116
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 116
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions have been met:
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:
The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. The headlight switch is off, or in . The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight switch is turned on.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with bulb type parking lights
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with bulb type parking lights
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers C
o n
tro ls
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield, becoming stuck. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a single sweep. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operations shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove the obstacle.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 117
Wipers and Washers The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain.
Adjusting the delay Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay.
Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever, the wipers make two or three more sweeps before stopping.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring
MIST
INT: Low speed with intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull to use washer.
Long delay
Short delay
117
118
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
C o
n tro
ls
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on whether the exterior lights are on or off. The instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are on.
Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 118
Brightness Control When the parking lights are turned on and the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. The information display will return to its original state several seconds after you adjust the brightness.
Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the information display while you are adjusting it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Control Knob
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button C
o n
tro ls
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to damage the heating wires. It is critical to wipe the window from side to side along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long period when the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 119
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32F (0C) or below, they do not automatically switch off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
119* Not available on all models
120
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*
C o
n tro
ls
1Driving Position Memory System*
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 120
Driving Position Memory System*
You can store two drivers seat positions with the driving position memory system. When you unlock and open the drivers door with a remote, the seat adjusts automatically to one of the two preset positions.
DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1. DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System* C
o n
tro ls
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation will be canceled when: You do not press the memory button within five
seconds. You readjust the seat position before the double-
beep. You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you: Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2). Adjust the seat position.
Shift into any position except (P.
Release the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 121
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the drivers seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button. u You will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink. 3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET button. u Once the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the button you pressed stays on.
1. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2). u You will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the memorized position. When it has finished moving, you will hear a beep, and the indicator light stays on.
Storing a Position in Memory
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
SET Button
Recalling the Stored Position
Memory Button 1
Memory Button 2
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
121
122
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.
3WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 122
Adjusting the Steering Wheel The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out. u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators. 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.
To adjust
To lockLever
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 123
Adjusting the Mirrors
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 125
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R.
Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.
When driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror always reduces the glare from headlights behind you, based in inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature is always active.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Tab
Daytime Position
Night Position
Up
Down
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
Sensor
Up
Down
123* Not available on all models
124
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
C o
n tro
ls 1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 124
Power Door Mirrors You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner segments. The outer segment is slightly curved to provide a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror. This wider view may help you check areas that are not visible using a standard door mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Inner Segment
Outer Segment
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 125
Adjusting the Seats
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.
Adjusting the Seat Positions Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.
Adjusting the drivers power seat*
Move back.
Allow sufficient space.
Horizontal Position Adjustment
Height Adjustment
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Lumbar Support Adjustment
125Continued* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
126
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 126
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar.
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.
Drivers seat is shown.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions C
o n
tro ls
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.
3WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 127
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Continued 127
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
128
C o
n tro
ls
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
For a head restraint system to work properly: Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs. Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back. Install each restraint in its proper location.
3WARNING Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 128
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rear- impact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.
Adjusting the front head restraint positions To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Adjusting the Head Restraints
Position head in the center of the head restraint.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions C
o n
tro ls
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
To remove the rear outer headrestraints, fold down the seat-back first.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 132
3WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 129
A passenger sitting in the center back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.
Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Continued 129
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
130
C o
n tro
ls
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 130
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions C
o n
tro ls
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip over the front seat belt. If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the seat-back forward.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 131
Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seat- back forward.
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever tilts the seat-back forward.
Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment lever, or pushing down the front passenger seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back forward. You can also use these levers to move the seat forward.
Rear Seat Access
Fold-down Lever
Driver side
Models with drivers power seat
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever
Models with drivers manual seat
Seat-back Angle Adjustment Lever
Release Lever
Passenger side
131
132
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
C o
n tro
ls
1Folding Down the Rear Seat
The rear seat-back can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning a seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 48
Also make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 132
Rear Seats
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the guide.
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.
3. Fold the seat-back down.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints P. 129
Folding Down the Rear Seat
Guide
Center Shoulder Belt
Release Lever
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 133
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
o n
tro ls
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following situations: When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door.
When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 272
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: When you lock the driver's door. When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
When you close the driver's door with the key in the ignition switch.
When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY mode.
If you leave either door open without the key in the ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Interior Lights
ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: When either of the doors are opened. You unlock the driver's door.
You remove the key from the ignition switch.
When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.
Interior Light Switches
Door Activated Position
Off
Door Activated Position On
Off
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
133Continued
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Lights
134
C o
n tro
ls
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated position and either door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 134
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.
Map Lights
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Glove Box
3WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 135
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
You can lock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key.
Pull the handle to open the console compartment.
Glove Box
Glove Box
Handle
To Lock
Console Compartment
135Continued
136
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 136
Pull the handle to open the pocket.
Center Pocket*
Handle
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 137
Front seat beverage holders
Rear seat beverage holders
Beverage Holders
Continued 137
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
138
C o
n tro
ls
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 180 watts (15 amps).
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 138
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.
Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it.
Accessory power socket (console compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Accessory Power Sockets
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Coat Hooks
The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy items.
1Cargo Hooks
Heavy objects may damage the hook. Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than 6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 393
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 139
There are coat hooks behind the center pillar on both sides. Pull them down to use them.
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.
Coat Hooks
Cargo Hooks
Continued 139
uu Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items
140
C o
n tro
ls
1Sunglasses Holder
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 140
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.
Sunglasses Holder
Push
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience Itemsu Interior Convenience Items C
o n
tro ls
1Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off.
3WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 141
The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats faster than the LO setting.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off. When a comfortable temperature is reached, select LO to keep the seat warm.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Seat Heaters*
141* Not available on all models
142
C o
n tro
ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 142
Climate Control System
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that was pressed will be controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.
Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the drivers side or passengers side control
buttons. 3. Press the (on/off) button to cancel.
Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicles interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor ventsDashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
AUTO Button
Drivers Side Temperature Control Buttons
(Recirculation) Button
/ (Fan Control) Buttons A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Passengers Side Temperature Control Buttons
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control C
o n
tro ls
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 143
Pressing the button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.
To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Press the button. 2. Press the button.
Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
143
144
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
C o
n tro
ls
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the button, the system changes to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately.
The system adjusts each temperature based on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun position updated by the navigation systems GPS.
Models with navigation system
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 144
Synchronized Mode
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button. u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using drivers side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors C
o n
tro ls
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 145
Automatic Climate Control Sensors The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.Sensor
Sensor
145
146
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 146
* Not available on all m
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 147
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System USB Port .......................................... 149 Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 150 Audio System Theft Protection* ....... 151 Region Setting ................................. 152 Audio Remote Controls.................... 153
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 154 Audio/Information Screen ................ 155 Display Setup ................................... 160 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 161 Playing a CD .................................... 163 Playing an iPod ................................ 166 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 169 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 171 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 174
Models with one display
odels
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 176 Audio with Touch Screen ................. 177 Audio/Information Screen ................ 180 Display Setup ................................... 186 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 187 Playing XM Radio* ......................... 191 Playing a CD .................................... 194 Playing an iPod ................................ 197 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 201 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 204 Playing Bluetooth Audio................. 207
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 209 Audio with Touch Screen ................. 210 Audio/Information Screen ................ 212
Models with two displays
Models with navigation system
Display Setup................................... 217 Voice Control Operation .................. 218 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 226 Playing XM Radio........................... 230 Playing a CD .................................... 233 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio.....236 Playing an iPod ................................ 246 Playing Internet Radio ...................... 254 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 257 Playing Bluetooth Audio ................ 260
Audio Error Messages ...................... 262 General Information on the Audio System.....268 Customized Features ........................ 272 HomeLink Universal Transceiver*.. 310 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink..... 312, 349 Compass* .......................................... 387
147
148
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 148
Audio System
1About Your Audio System
XM Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on XM Radio, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 268
XM Radio is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported.
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
About Your Audio System
See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and XM Radio service*. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio*, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.
Models with navigation system
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port Featu
res
1USB Port
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 149
USB Port Install the iPod dock connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port.
149
150
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
Featu res
1Auxiliary Input Jack
You can return to AUX mode by pressing the AUX button.
You can return to AUX mode by selecting Change Source on the Audio menu screen or Source on the touchscreen.
Replacement of the audio system with other than a genuine Honda system may make the auxiliary jack inoperable.
Models with one display
Models with two displays Models with navigation system
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 150
Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
Models with one display
Models with two displays
Models with navigation system
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection* Featu
res
1Audio System Theft Protection*
Find the audio system's security code and serial number label in your owners manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial number in this owners manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and security code from a dealer.
You can register the security code at Owner Link (owners.honda.com.), and find information on how to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at radio-navicode.honda.com.
U.S. models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 151
Audio System Theft Protection*
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system. u If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the
audio security code. See step 3. 2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the systems control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle. If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter PIN Code appears on the audio/ information screen.
3. If the two steps do not work, you can enter the audio security code using the touch screen. If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.
151* Not available on all models
152
uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting
Featu res
1Region Setting
The region setting is required only when the battery power is temporarily disconnected. It has been usually set to your vehicles region type beforehand.
You cannot change the setting once you have completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if you selected an incorrect region.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 152
Region Setting The audio systems region setting may be lost when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio system. Follow the steps below: 1. Press to select OK. 2. Rotate to select the region you live in, then press . 3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
Models with two displays
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Featu
res
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded. Pandora, Bluetooth Audio, and AhaTM appear when a connection (Bluetooth or USB) is established with a device.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 153
Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FM AM XM* CD HDD* USB iPod Bluetooth Audio Pandora* AhaTM* AUX
(+(- (Volume) Buttons Press (+ : To increase the volume. Press (- : To decrease the volume.
Buttons When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
When listening to a CD, HDD*, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
When listening to a CD, HDD* or USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
When listening to Pandora* or AhaTM*
Press : To skip to the next song. Press and hold : To select the next station. Press and hold : To select the previous station.
Button
SOURCE Button
Button
(+ Button
(- Button
153* Not available on all models
154
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 154
Audio System Basic Operation
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 162 2 Radio text P. 162 2 Music Search P. 164, 167, 172 2 Scan P. 165, 173 2 Random/Repeat P. 165, 168, 173
This product includes software codes licensed under the conditions stated by the copyright holder. For license conditions and the copy of the corresponding source code, visit: http:// www.hondaopensource1.com/001
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to select any mode. The available mode includes Change Source, Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from Scan, Random/ Repeat, and so on. BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. Press once and make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models with one display
Button Selector Knob
MENU ButtonBACK Button
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
udio Trip Computer (Current Drive)
lock/Wallpaper Trip Computer (History of Trip A)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 155
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
(Display) Button A
C
Audio/Information Screen
155Continued
156
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 156
Audio Shows the current audio information.
Trip computer (Current Drive) Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
Trip computer (History of Trip A) Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles. Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1Wallpaper Setup
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 157
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port P. 149
2. Press the SETTINGS button. 3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New Wallpaper, then press . u The preview of the imported data is
displayed. 5. Rotate to select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen. 6. Press to save the data. u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.
Wallpaper Setup
Continued 157
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
158
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 158
Select wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Set, then press .
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Featu
res
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 159
Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following choices:
Selector Knob
SETTINGS Button
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SVC
159
160
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Featu res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black level settings in the same manner.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 160
Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press .
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press .
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color, then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .
Changing the Screen Brightness
Changing the Screens Color Theme
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
resSeek/Skip Buttons Press and to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 161
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
FM/AM Button Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: Tune to the selected station. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
161Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
162
Featu res
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153 You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU button and selecting Change Source on the MENU screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 162
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press to select Stop, or press the BACK button.
Radio Data System (RDS)
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 163
Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
CD Button Press to play a CD.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
163Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
164
Featu res
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 164
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)
File Selection
Folder Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 165
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
165
166
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Featu res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 166
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button Press to select iPod (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
Album Art
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 167
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a menu. 4. Press to display the items on that menu. 5. Rotate to select an item, then press .
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Continued 167
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
168
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Song: Repeats the current file. Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 168
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
uuAudio System Basic Operationu Featu
res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
AUX Button Press to select Pandora. Skip Button Press to skip a song.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
USB Indicator Appears when a phone is connected.
Rating Icon
Preset Button (3) Press to select Like.
Preset Button (4) Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (5) Press to select Bookmark Artist.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 169
Playing Internet Radio Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
iPhone
Audio/Information Screen
Selector Knob Turn to switch to another station.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Preset Button (1) Press to switch the mode between pause and resume. Preset Button (2) Press to select Dislike.
169Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
170
Featu res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
Changing Stations To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora Menu
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora P. 265
Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 170
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Like (Thumbs-up) Dislike (Thumbs-down) Station List Change Source Bookmark Track Bookmark Artist Play/Pause
Operating a menu item 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select an item, then press .
Pandora Menu
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
Seek/Skip Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Turn to change folders. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 171
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port P. 149
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
AUX Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
171Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
172
Featu res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 268
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 172
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a folder. 4. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 5. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
File Selection
Folder Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 173
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn off a play mode 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
173
174
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
Featu res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 174
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 320
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
AUX Button Press to select Bluetooth Audio.
Skip Buttons Press or to change files.
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/ Information Screen
Preset Button (1) Press to resume playing a file.
Preset Button (2) Press to pause a playing file.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the AUX button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 175
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
175
176
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 176
Audio System Basic Operation
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 189 2 Save Preset P. 188, 193 2 Radio text P. 190 2 Music Search P. 195, 199, 205 2 Scan P. 196, 206 2 Random/Repeat P. 196, 200, 206
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK buttons to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. Also press to select any mode. The available mode includes Change Source, Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on. BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. Press once and make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Models with two displays
Button
Selector Knob
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
BACK Button
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen Featu
res
1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
Select to go back to the previous screen.
Use the / / / icons to turn the page.
X
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 177
Audio with Touch Screen Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.
Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Select More to display the menu items.
Selecting an Audio Source
Displaying the Menu Items
Select Source.
Source List Icons
Select More. Menu Items
177Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
178
Featu res
1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings: Brightness Contrast Black Level Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime modes.
Beep Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the screen.
Keyboard Changes the on-screen keyboard from the alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
Fade Timer Sets the screen black out timing.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 178
Select to adjust the clock and screen settings.
Changing the Clock settings 2 Clock P. 84
Changing the Screen settings 1. Select Screen Settings. 2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.
Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
Select .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen Featu
res
1Adjusting the Sound
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 185
1Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
The phone operation screen is available when a phone is paired to HFL.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 179
1. Select More, then Sound Settings. 2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.
Select to switch to the phone operation screen. 2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 312
Adjusting the Sound
Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
Select .
179
180
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
udio Trip Computer (Current Drive)
lock/Wallpaper Trip Computer (History of Trip A)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 180
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
Using the button
(Display) Button A
C
Audio/Information Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 181
Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen. Rotate to select Audio, Phone, Info or Setting and press .
Audio Shows the current audio information.
Phone Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 312
Settings Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features P. 272
Using the DISP button
Function Change Screen
DISP Button
Selector Knob
181Continued
182
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 182
Info Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information. Press , rotate to select an item, then press .
Trip computer (Current Drive) Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
Trip computer (History of Trip A) Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles. Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
Deleting the history manually 1. Press on the History of Trip A screen. 2. Rotate to select Delete History, then press . 3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1Wallpaper Setup
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 183
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port P. 149
2. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
3. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
4. Rotate to select Add New, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list.
5. Rotate to select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen. 6. Press to save the data. u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.
Wallpaper Setup
Continued 183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
184
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 184
Select wallpaper 1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Set, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Delete wallpaper 1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Featu
res
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 185
Adjusting the Sound 1. Press and hold the DISP button. 2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following choices:
Selector Knob
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
BACK Button
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Subwoofer
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SUBW
SVC
185
186
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Featu res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 186
Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press .
4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press .
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate to select Background Color, then press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .
Changing the Screen Brightness
Changing the Screens Color Theme
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
resTune Up/Down Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Source Select to change a band or change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 187
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
To listen to a stored channel, select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
Presets Select to store a station.
More Select to display the menu items.
187Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
188
Featu res
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153 You can also switch the mode by pressing and selecting Change Source on the Audio menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 188
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press . 4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
2. Select More. 3. Select Save Preset. 4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Preset Memory
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 189
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Station List, then press . 3. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Station List, then press . 3. Rotate to select UPDATE LIST, then press .
Radio Data System (RDS)
Continued 189
190
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 190
Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press . To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan. To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio* Featu
resCategory Up/Down Icons Select or to display and select an XM Radio category.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. In channel mode, select and hold to change the channel rapidly.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 191
Playing XM Radio*
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
To listen to a stored channel, select 1-12.
Presets Select to store a station.
More Select to display the menu items.
191Continued* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio*
192
Featu res
1Playing XM Radio*
In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when XM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 192
1. Select the XM mode. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153 2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 177
2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press . 4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press . 5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press . 6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .
2. Select More. 3. Select Tune Mode. 4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode. 5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or the
preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
To Play the XM Radio
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio* Featu
res
1Playing XM Radio*
You can store 12 XM stations into the preset memory.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 193
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press . 4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
.
2. Select More. 3. Select Save Preset. 4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Preset Memory
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
193* Not available on all models
194
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Featu res
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 194
Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
More Select to display the menu items.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Source Select to change an audio source.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 195
1. Press . Rotate to select Music Search, then press .
2. Rotate to select a folder. 3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)
Folder Selection
File Selection
Continued 195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
196
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 196
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/ Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
Selector Knob
Random/Repeat is selected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Album Bar Select to search for an album.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 197
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
More Select to display the menu items.
Album Art Icon
Source Select to change an audio source.
Album Art
197Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
198
Featu res
1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is moving.
Select to go back to the previous screen.X
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 198
1. Select the album bar. u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album. u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
How to Select an Album
Album AAA Artist AAA
Select an album image.
Select the album bar.
Album Bar Album Image
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 199
1. Press . Rotate to select Music Search, then press .
2. Rotate to select a menu. 3. Press to display the items on that menu. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Folder Selection
File Selection
Continued 199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
200
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 200
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Shuffle/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu
res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
USB Indicator Appears when a phone is connected.
Rating Icon
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Skip Icon Select to skip a song.
Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 201
Playing Internet Radio Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Compatible phones only
iPhone
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
More Select to display the menu items.
Source Select Pandora or AhaTM.
Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a song.
Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a song.
201Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
202
Featu res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
Changing Stations To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora Menu*
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora P. 265
Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 202
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are: Like (Thumbs-up) Dislike (Thumbs-down) Station List Change Source Bookmark Track Bookmark Artist Play/Pause
Operating a menu item 1. Press to switch to the Audio menu
screen. 2. Rotate to select an item and press .
Pandora Menu*
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu
res
1AhaTM Menu
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that organizes your favorite web content into live radio stations. You can access podcasts, Internet radio stations, location-based services, and audio updates from social media sites.
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio* P. 267
The menu items vary depending on the station you selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app must be installed on your phone. Visit owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit www.aharadio.com for more information.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 203
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are:
Operating a menu item 1. Press to switch to the Audio menu
screen. 2. Rotate to select an item and press .
AhaTM Menu
Like 15sec Back Play/Pause 30sec Skip Stations View text Change Source View list Dislike
203* Not available on all models
204
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Featu res
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a file.
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 204
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 149
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
More Select to display the menu items.
Source Select to change an audio source.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 268
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 205
1. Press . Rotate to select Music Search, then press .
2. Rotate to select a folder. 3. Press to change the display to a list of
files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Folder Selection
File Selection
Continued 205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
206
Featu res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 206
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/ Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
Selector Knob
Random/Repeat is selected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Selector Knob
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 207
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 320
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change files.
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Audio/ Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
Play Icon
Pause Icon
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
More Select to display the menu items.
Selector Knob Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select or to change folder.
207Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
208
Featu res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 208
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file
1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen. 2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
Select the play icon or pause icon.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Selector knob
Audio with Touch Screen
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 209
Audio System Basic Operation
res
1Audio System Basic Operation
Voice Control System The audio system is voice operable. See the navigation system manual for details.
These indications are used to show how to operate the interface dial.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Move , , or to select secondary menu.
Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 228 2 Save Preset P. 227, 232 2 Radio text P. 229 2 Music Search P. 234, 238, 248, 258 2 Scan P. 235, 239, 259 2 Random/Repeat P. 235, 239, 249, 259
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Use the interface dial or MENU button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.
Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. Move right, left, up or down to select secondary menu. MENU button: Press to select any mode. The available mode includes Change Source, Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from Scan, Random/ Repeat, and so on. BACK button: Press to go back to the previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/ information screen brightness. Press once and make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode.
Models with navigation system
Interface Dial
MENU ButtonBACK Button
Button
209
210
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
Featu res
1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
Select to go back to the previous screen.
Use the / / / icons to turn the page.
X
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 210
Audio with Touch Screen Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.
Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Select More to display the menu items.
Selecting an Audio Source
Displaying the Menu Items
Select Source.
Source List Icons
Select More. Menu Items
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen Featu
res
1Adjusting the Sound
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 216
1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings: Brightness Contrast Black Level Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime modes.
Beep Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the screen.
Keyboard Changes the on-screen keyboard from the alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
Fade Timer Sets the screen black out timing.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 211
1. Select More, then Sound Settings. 2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.
1. Select More, then Screen Settings. 2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.
Adjusting the Sound
Changing the Screen Settings
211
212
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Featu res
1Switching the Display
You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.
udio
nfo
Navigation
Phone
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 212
Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.
Press the (display) button to change the display.
Switching the Display
(Display) Button A
I
Audio/Information Screen
AUDIO ButtonNAV Button
PHONE Button INFO Button
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 213
Audio Shows the current audio information.
Navigation Shows the navigation screen. 2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Phone Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 349
Info Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate to select an item, then press .
Trip computer (Current Drive) Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
Trip computer (History of Trip A) Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles. Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
Deleting the history manually 1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press . 2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,
then press .
Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
213Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
214
Featu res
1Wallpaper Setup
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 6 MB. The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 214
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port P. 149
2. Press the SETTINGS button. 3. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type. 4. Move to select Wallpaper. u The screen will change to the wallpaper
list. 5. Move to select Add New, then press . 6. Rotate to select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen. 7. Press , then move to select Start
Import. u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.
Wallpaper Setup
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Featu
res
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 215
Select wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move to select Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate to select Set, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move to select Wallpaper. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press . u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
7. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
215
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Featu res
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 216
Adjusting the Sound 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .
Rotate to scroll through the following choices:
SETTINGS Button
Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation
Subwoofer
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SUBW
SVC
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Featu
res
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 217
Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
. 4. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Background Color,
then press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
Changing the Screen Brightness
Changing the Screens Color Theme
217
218
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.
1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 218
Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of the navigation system functions. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. Close the windows and moonroof. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time. Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Voice Recognition
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 219
The system accepts these commands on the Voice Portal screen. Call Your contact name Call Phone Number Find nearest POI category name Go home Route menu Cancel route
The system accepts these commands on any screen. Call by number Call by name Call Phone number Call your contact name
Contacts that are imported from your phone to the vehicle are all made available by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded for each of your Speed Dial entries.
Voice Portal Commands
Phone Commands
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
The system accepts these commands on any screen. Trip computer Traffic information Display clock Display wallpaper
Navigation Commands
Info Commands
On Screen Commands
219Continued
220
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 220
The system accepts these commands on most screens. Climate control automatic*1
Climate control off*1
Air conditioner on*1
Air conditioner off*1
Climate control defrost on*1
Climate control defrost off*1
Rear defrost on*1
Rear defrost off*1
Climate control fresh air Climate control recirculate Climate control vent Climate control bi-level Climate control floor Climate control floor and defrost Fan speed up Fan speed down Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7) Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87F, 15
to 29C) Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87F, 15 to 29C) Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87F, 15 to 29C) Temperature up Temperature down
Climate Control Commands
Climate control sync off*1
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
The system accepts these commands on most screens.
Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or iPod device using your voice. To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen and say:Music search.
Audio Commands
Song By VoiceTM commands Music search List album (specify album) List artist (specify artist) List composer (specify composer) List genre (specify genre) List playlist (specify playlist) Play album (specify album) Play artist (specify artist) Play composer (specify composer) Play genre (specify genre) Play playlist (specify playlist) Play song (specify song) What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? Whats playing? Whos playing? What album is this?
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 221
HDD commands Hard Disc Drive play Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30) Hard Disc Drive skip forward Hard Disc Drive skip back Hard Disc Drive album up*2
Hard Disc Drive album down*2
Hard Disc Drive track up Hard Disc Drive track down Hard Disc Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disc Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disc Drive track random*1
Hard Disc Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disc Drive track scan*1
Hard Disc Drive normal play What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? Whats playing? Whos playing? What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action. *2: These commands are available only in the corresponding playback mode. For example, Artist commands are available only in Artist mode.
Radio commands Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM Radio select AM Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9) Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to 1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up Radio seek down Radio next station Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12) Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12) Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6) Radio scan*1
Radio select XM XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five]) XM channel down XM category up XM category down XM preset # (#: 1 to 12) XM scan*1
XM category mode XM channel mode
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
NOTE: Radio volume levels cannot be controlled using voice control.
Disc commands Disc play Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30) Disc skip forward Disc skip back Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up Disc folder down Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
221Continued
222
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 222
iPod commands iPod play iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30) iPod skip forward iPod skip back iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? Whats playing? Whos playing? What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
USB commands USB play USB play track # (#: 1 to 30) USB skip forward USB skip back USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up USB folder down USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
Bluetooth Audio commands Bluetooth Audio play Bluetooth Audio skip forward Bluetooth Audio skip back Bluetooth Audio group up Bluetooth Audio group down Bluetooth Audio pause Bluetooth Audio resume Bluetooth Audio track random Bluetooth Audio track repeat
NOTE: Bluetooth Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth Audio devices.
AUX commands Auxiliary play
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 223
Pandora commands*
The system accepts these commands while the Pandora is playing. Pandora play Pandora skip forward Pandora station up Pandora station down Pandora pause Pandora resume Pandora thumbs up Pandora thumbs down
* Not available on all models
AhaTM Radio commands The system accepts these commands while the AhaTM is playing. Aha radio play Aha radio skip forward Aha radio skip back Aha radio station up Aha radio station down Aha radio resume Aha radio pause Aha radio like Aha radio dislike
Internet service commands Internet service play Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1
*1: The system accepts these commands while the Internet service is playing.
223Continued
224
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 224
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected by saying each individual letter or by saying a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases are:
Keyboard Entry Commands
Say . . . Or say . . . A Apple/Alpha B Boy/Bravo C Charlie D Dog/Delta E Edward/Echo F Frank/Foxtrot G George/Golf H Henry/Hotel I Igloo/India J John/Juliet K King/Kilo L Larry/Lima M Mary/Mike N Nancy/November O Oscar P Paul/Papa Q Queen/Quebec R Robert/Romeo S Sam/Sierra T Tom/Tango U Uncle/Uniform V Victor W William/Whiskey X X-ray Y Yellow/Yankee Z Zebra/Zulu
Numbers
Number . . . Or say . . . 0 Zero 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 Four 5 Five 6 Six 7 Seven 8 Eight 9 Nine
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 225
Symbols
Symbol . . . Or say . . . - Hyphen ! Exclamation point Double Quote # Pound $ Dollar % Percent & Ampersand Apostrophe ( Open Parenthesis ) Close Parenthesis ~ Tilde / Slash < Less than > Greater than { Open Brace } Close Brace
Accented letters
Symbol . . . Or say . . . A grave A circumflex A umlaut C cedilla E grave E acute E circumflex E umlaut I grave I circumflex I umlaut O circumflex U grave U circumflex U umlaut
Punctuation marks
Symbol . . . Or say . . . @ At Sign ^ Caret * Asterisk _ Underscore ` Back Quote , Comma . Dot ? Question mark : Colon ; Semicolon + Plus
225
226
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Featu res
Tune Up/Down Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Source Select to change a band or change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal.
More Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to tune the radio frequency. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 226
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
To listen to a stored channel, select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
Presets Select to store a station.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153 You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU button and selecting Change Source on the Audio menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 227
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press . 4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
2. Select More. 3. Select Save Preset. 4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Preset Memory
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
Continued 227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
228
Featu res
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 228
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Station List, then press . 3. Rotate to select the station, then press .
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Station List, then press . 3. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .
Radio Data System (RDS)
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 229
Radio text Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press . To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan. To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
229
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio
Featu res Category Up/Down Icons
Select or to display and select an XM Radio category.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. In channel mode, select and hold to change the channel rapidly.
More Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to tune the radio frequency. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 230
Playing XM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
To listen to a stored channel, select 1-12.
Presets Select to store a station.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio Featu
res
1Playing XM Radio
You can control the XM radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when XM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 231
1. Select the XM mode. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153 2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 210
2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press . 4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press . 5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press . 6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .
2. Select More. 3. Select Tune Mode. 4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode. 5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
To Play the XM Radio
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
Continued 231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM Radio
232
Featu res
1Playing XM Radio
You can store 12 XM stations into the preset memory.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 232
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press . 4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
2. Select More. 3. Select Save Preset. 4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Preset Memory
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track/file.
More Select to display the menu items.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 233
Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
233Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
234
Featu res
1Playing a CD
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands. 2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 234
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to select a file from the Music Search list.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)
Folder Selection
File Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 235
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
Random/Repeat is selected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
235
236
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
Featu res
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD.
Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons Select to skip to the next playlist/ album, and to skip to the beginning of the previous playlist/ album.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
More Select to display the menu items.
SETTINGS Button Press to go the Setting menu screen.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 236
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play the tracks using various search methods.
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
1Recording a Music CD to HDD
You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 240 2 Editing Track Information P. 243
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned off while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you play back from the HDD.
Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available during recording.
You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM, HDD, etc.) while recording.
Please note that there is no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Clearing the HDD Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 309
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 237
When Recording from CD is set to Auto, the songs on music CDs are automatically recorded to the HDD the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
2 Customized Features P. 272
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press .
When Recording from CD is set to Manual, the songs on music CDs can be manually recorded to the HDD. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Rec to HDD, then press .
Recording a Music CD to HDD
Stop Recording
Recording a CD Manually
Recording Indicator
Recording
Ready to record
Continued 237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
238
Featu res
1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
You can control the HDD audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 218 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 250
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed using ultra-efficient compression technology; therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and cannot be recovered. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the display.
2 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 263
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 238
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press . 3. Rotate , move or , then press to
select a track from the Music Search list. u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists: original playlists and user playlists. An original playlist is automatically created for each album when a music CD is recorded. You can customize up to six user playlists provided on the HDD by adding tracks from your original playlists.
How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the first track in each album. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on HDD.
Random/Repeat Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current album. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track. Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current album in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 239
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
Random/Repeat is selected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
Continued 239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
240
Featu res
1Editing an Album or Playlist
The maximum number of songs in each of the six user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites the oldest songs.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a user playlist does not remove the playlist folder. The folder retains the playlist name and artist information.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 240
Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
Editing an album 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Albums, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit an album name: Rotate to select Edit name, then press
. u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete an album: Rotate to select Delete, then press .
To edit track information or delete a track: Rotate to select List Tracks, then press
. 2 Editing Track Information P. 243
Editing an Album or Playlist
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 241
Editing a playlist 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press
. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. To edit a playlist name: Rotate to select Edit name, then press
. u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete a playlist: Rotate to select Delete, then press .
To edit track information or delete a track: Rotate to select List Tracks, then press
. 2 Editing Track Information P. 243
241Continued
242
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 242
Creating a new playlist 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press
. 4. Rotate to select Create New Playlist,
then press . u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen, then select tracks from the Music Search list.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 243
Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Tracks, then press . 4. Rotate to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. To edit track information: Rotate to select Edit name, then press
. u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the audio with touch screen. Move , rotate to select OK, then press .
To delete a track: Rotate to select Delete, then press .
Editing Track Information
243Continued
244
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 244
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing the Gracenote Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press
. 3. Rotate to select Albums, then press . 4. Rotate to select an album you want to
edit, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Edit name, then press .
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then press . u The system starts to access the
Gracenote Album Info.
Displaying Music Information
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
1Updating Gracenote Album Info
To acquire updated files: Consult a dealer. U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com. Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca. Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten or erased.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 245
Update the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) that is included with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or connect the USB flash drive that includes the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD mode.
3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Update
Gracenote Album Info. 4. Rotate to select Update by USB or
Update by CD, then press . u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the screen. Press to finish.
Updating Gracenote Album Info
245
246
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Featu res
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Album Bar Select to search for an album.
Source Select to change an audio source.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
More Select to display the menu items.
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 246
Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
Album Art
Album Art Icon
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is moving.
Select to go back to the previous screen.X
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 247
1. Select the album bar. u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album. u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
How to Select an Album
Select an album image.
Select the album bar.
Album Bar Album Image
Continued 247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
248
Featu res
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
You can control an iPod using voice commands. 2 Voice Control Operation P. 218 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 250
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 248
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to select a song from the Music Search list.
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 249
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Shuffle/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
249
250
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Featu res
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options: On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are
available. Off: Disable the feature.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 250
Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod using voice commands.
To enable SBV 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Song by Voice, then
press . 4. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu
res
1Searching for music using SBV
Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 220
NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the HDD or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 252
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 251
Searching for music using SBV 1. Press the (Talk) button and say Music
Search to activate the SBV feature for the HDD and iPod.
2. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say (List) Artist A to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say Play Artist A to start playing songs by that artist.
3. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say Music Search again to re-activate this mode.
Continued 251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
252
Featu res
1Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 252
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the HDD or iPod.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings,
then press . 3. Rotate to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press . 4. Move and rotate to select New
Modification, then press . 5. Rotate to select HDD or iPod, then
press .
Phonetic Modification
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 253
6. Rotate to select the item to modify (e.g., Artist), then press . u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen. 7. Rotate to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen. u To listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate to select Play, then press .
u To delete the current phonetic modification, rotate to select Delete, then press .
8. Rotate to select Modify, then press .
9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to use (e.g., Artist A) when prompted.
10. Move to select OK to exit. u The artist No Name is phonetically
modified to Artist A. When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command Play Artist A to play songs by the artist No Name.
253
254
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Featu res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call 1-888-528-7876.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.
USB Indicator Appears when a phone is connected.
Rating Icon
Skip Icon Select to skip a song.
More Select to display the menu items.
Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station.
Source Select Pandora or AhaTM.
Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a song.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 254
Playing Internet Radio Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth.
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Compatible phones only
iPhone
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a song.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio Featu
res
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you'll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or composers and Pandora will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio. Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
Changing Stations To change stations, activate the Pandora menu, select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora Menu*
You can control Pandora using voice commands. 2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora P. 265
Pandora may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 255
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are:
Operating a menu item The menu items are shown in the lower half of the audio/information screen. Rotate to select an item and press .
To select Change Source, press the MENU button, then press .
Pandora Menu*
Skip Forward Dislike (Thumbs-down) Play/Pause Bookmark This Song Station List Bookmark This Artist Like (Thumbs-up) Change Source
Continued 255* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
256
Featu res
1AhaTM Menu
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that organizes your favorite web content into live radio stations. You can access podcasts, Internet radio stations, location-based services, and audio updates from social media sites.
You can control AhaTM using voice commands. 2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio* P. 267
The menu items vary depending on the station you selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app must be installed on your phone. Visit owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit www.aharadio.com for more information.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 256
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicles audio system. The available items are:
Operating a menu item The menu items are shown in the lower half of the audio/information screen. Rotate to select an item and press .
To select Change Source or Stations, press the MENU button, then press .
AhaTM Menu
Like View text Dislike View list Play/Pause Reply 15sec Back Change Source 30sec Skip Stations
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
More Select to display the menu items.
Source Select to change an audio source.
USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a file.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 257
Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 149
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Audio/Information Screen
BACK Button Press to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
Audio with Touch Screen
257Continued
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
258
Featu res
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
You can control a USB flash drive using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 268
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 264
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 258
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate , move or , then press to select a file from the Music Search list.
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Folder Selection
File Selection
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Featu
res
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 259
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press . 3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Random/Repeat. 3. Select a mode.
To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .
1. Select More. 2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
How to Select a Play Mode
Random/Repeat is selected.
Interface Dial
Random/Repeat is selected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
259
260
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio
Featu res
1Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth Audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 218
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 260
Playing Bluetooth Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 355
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
Audio/ Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
Play IconPause Icon More Select to display the menu items.
Source Select to change an audio source.
(Power) Button Press to turn the audio system on and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob Turn to adjust the volume.
Interface Dial/ ENTER Button Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. Move up, down, right and left to select secondary menu.
Skip/Seek Icons Select or to change files.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
Folder Up/Down Icons Select or to change folders.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth Audio Featu
res
1To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 261
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL- compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .
Select the play icon or pause icon.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Interface Dial
Audio with Touch Screen
261
262
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 262
Audio Error Messages
Solution
will be skipped. The next supported track/file lly.
t) button and remove the disc, and check that the cleared. isc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
CDs P. 270
age reappears, press the button, and pull out
disc. lays, there is a problem with the first disc. age repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, . ce the disc out of the player.
isc is not damaged or deformed. CDs P. 270
ystem off and allow the player to cool down until e is cleared.
CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported Current track/file
plays automatica
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual Push Eject
Mechanical error
Press the (ejec error message is
Check that the d disc again.
2 Protecting If the error mess
the disc. Insert a different
If the new disc p If the error mess
contact a dealer Do not try to for
Mecha Error
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error Check that the d
2 Protecting
Heat Error High temperature Turn the audio s
the error messag
uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Featu
res
Solution
ystem off and allow the player to cool down until e is cleared.
ystem has difficulty reading the HDD when the elow approximately -22F (-30C). The navigation automatically when the display warms up.
file format not supported. Current track will be t supported track plays automatically.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 263
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
HDD access error. Please consult your dealer.
The navigation system temperature is too high. For protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.
Turn the audio s the error messag
The navigation system temperature is too low. For protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.
The navigation s temperature is b system starts up
Unplayable File Appears when a skipped. The nex
Models with navigation system
263
264
uuAudio Error Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive
Featu res
ion
ter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system ce that caused the error.
it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
e iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
M or an unsupported format. This error message ng.
are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
.
If it appears when a supported device is
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 264
iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solut
USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adap USB adapter unit.
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the devi
Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge th
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DR appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next so
No Data
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. connected, reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora Featu
res
Solution
n incompatible device is connected. Disconnect turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do e device that caused the error.
ere is no station list on the device. Use the device n.
ou try to skip a song or select Dislike over the umber of times in an hour.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 265
Pandora If an error occurs while playing Pandora, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when a the device. Then not reconnect th
There is no station list in the device. Please add the station list to your device.
No stations have been created. Please create a station on the device.
Appears when th to create a statio
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may skip each hour.
Appears when y predetermined n
U.S. models
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
265Continued
266
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora
Featu res
Solution
e commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
o data is available with Pandora activated. and reconnect the device.
andora version is not supported. Update latest version.
he Pandora server is in maintenance. Try again
andora is unable to play music. Check your
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 266
Error Message
Unable to save rating. Unable to save bookmark or Unable to skip
Appears when th
No data Appears when n Reboot the app
PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when P Pandora to the
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when t later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your mobile phone
Appears when P device.
uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM Radio* Featu
res
Solution
e AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.
n incompatible device is connected. Disconnect turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. t the device that caused the error.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 267
AhaTM Radio*
If an error occurs while playing AhaTM, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your mobile device.
Appears when th
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when a the device. Then Do not reconnec
267* Not available on all models
268
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 268
General Information on the Audio System
1Subscribing to XM Radio
Contact Information for XM Radio: US: XM Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 852- 9696 Canada: XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877) 209-0079
1Receiving XM Radio
The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle. In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack
XM Radio Service*
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Turn the selector knob or the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM website to subscribe.
Switch to the XM mode by using the SOURCE button, or through the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Loading: XM is loading the audio or program information. Ch off air: The channel is not currently broadcasting. Ch unauthorized: XM radio is receiving information update from the network. No signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Ch unavailable: No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or title information is unavailable. Check antenna: There is a problem with the XM antenna. Contact a dealer.
Subscribing to XM Radio
Receiving XM Radio
XM Radio Display Messages
* Not available on all models
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs Featu
res
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 269
Recommended CDs Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
Also includes:
269Continued
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
270
Featu res
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
Damaged CDs
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
With Label/ Sticker
Using Printer Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/ Cracked
Warped Burrs
Small CDs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 270
Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives Featu
res
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 271
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
*1:Models with one display *2:Models with two displays or the navigation system
Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod nano (1st to 6th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) launch in 2012*1
iPod touch (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*2
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5*1
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S*2
USB Flash Drives
271
272
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 272
Customized Features
1Customized Features
When you customize settings: Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , and press . 2 List of customizable options P. 279
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition swith in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 273
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press and hold the DISP button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
Models with two displays
DISP Button
Audio/Information Screen
273Continued
274
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 274
Customization flow Models without navigation system
Clock Format
Background Color Header Clock Display Factory Data Reset
Clock Adjustment
Press the SETTINGS button.
Press and hold the DISP button.
Models with one display
Models with two displays
Language
Default
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth On/Off Bluetooth Device List
Voice Prompt
Brightness Contrast
Black Level Beep
Clock/ Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type Wallpaper
System Settings
Voice Recog
Bluetooth
Display
Clock
Other
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Trip B Reset Timing
Adjust Outside Temp. Display Trip A Reset Timing
Keyless Access Light Flash
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Forward Collision Warning Distance*
Door Unlock Mode
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
Memory Position Link Keyless Start Guidance Screens*
Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer Maintenance Reset
Setup*
n
tup*
o.
Keyless Access Beep
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 275
Default
Vehicle Settings
Driver Assist System
Meter Setup
TPMS Calibratio
Driving Position Se Keyless Access Setup*
Lighting Setup
Door Setup
Maintenance Inf
275Continued* Not available on all models
276
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Wallpaper
Source Select Popup
Clock Type
Sound
Cover Art*1
ect Bluetooth Audio Device*1
Bluetooth Device List*1
Clock Adjustment Clock Format
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 276
Default
Conn
Default
Audio Settings
Clock/ Wallpaper
Type Info
Settings
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Add Bluetooth Device Disconnect
Edit Speed Dial Auto Transfer Auto Answer
Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo*2
Enable Text Message*1, Enable Text/Email*2
Select Account*
Message Auto Reading
New Text Message Alert*1, New Text/Email Alert*2
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 277
Default
*1: Models with one display *2: Models with two displays
Phone Settings
Connect Phone
Text Message*1, Text/Email*2
Bluetooth Device
List
Phone
277Continued* Not available on all models
278
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Display
Show with Turn Signal Reference Lines
Default*1
Default
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Brightness Contrast
Black Level Color Tint
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 278
Default
Camera Settings
LaneWatch*
Rear Camera
*1: Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 279
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Display
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.
Beep Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when you operate the selector knob.
On*1/Off
Blue- tooth
Bluetooth On/Off Turns the Bluetooth on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a paired phone, and create a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 320
Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 322
Random/Fixed*1
Voice Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Beginner*1/Expert
Models without navigation system
279Continued
280
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
y type. Analog/Digital*1/ Small Digital/Off
type. or a new wallpaper. r a wallpaper. 57, 183
Blank/Galaxy*1/ Metallic/Add New
isplay from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
uage. English*1/French/ Spanish
color of the audio/ e audio with touch
Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Green
display comes on. On*1/Off
their factory default. ettings P. 307
Yes/No
ized items in the as default.
Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 280
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
System Settings
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock Type Changes the clock displa
Wallpaper
Changes the wallpaper Imports an image file f Deletes an image file fo
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 1
Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock. 2 Clock P. 84
Clock Format Selects the digital clock d
Other
Language Changes the display lang
Background Color Changes the background information screen and th screen*.
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to 2 Defaulting All the S
Default Cancels/Resets all custom System Settings group
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
MS. Cancel*1/Calibrate
e FCW alerts, or turns Long/Normal*1/ Short/Off
eading by a few -5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
w to reset trip meter A y A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
w to reset trip meter B y B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
feature on and off. On*1/Off
start guidance when nge power mode.
On*1/Off
position to a stored On*1/Off
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 281
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Vehicle Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TP
Driver Assist System Setup*
Forward Collision Warning Distance*
Changes at which distanc FCW on and off.
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature r degrees.
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of ho and average fuel econom
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of ho and average fuel econom
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Displays the push button conditions are met to cha
Driving Position Setup*
Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat setting.
281Continued* Not available on all models
282
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
lock when you grab the Driver Door Only*1/ All Doors
ts to blink when you On*1/Off
not when you grab On*1/Off
e the interior lights stay ors.
60seconds/ 30seconds*1/ 15seconds
e the exterior lights e driver's door.
60seconds/ 30seconds/ 15seconds*1/ 0seconds
e headlights to come Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 282
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Vehicle Settings
Keyless Access Setup*
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors un drivers door handle.
Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior ligh unlock/lock the doors.
Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or either front door handle.
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of tim on after you close the do
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of tim stay on after you close th
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for th on.
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
hen the doors With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift from P*2/Off
hen the doors
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted to Park*2/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off
door or both doors to f the remote.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
rior lights flash. eper sounds.
On*1/Off
for the doors to relock set after you unlock ng either door.
90seconds/ 60seconds/ 30seconds*1
isplay when you have ce service.
ized items in the s default.
Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 283
*1:Default Setting *2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Vehicle Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for w automatically lock.
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for w automatically unlock.
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver's unlock on the first push o
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exte LOCK (2nd push)- The be
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes and the security system to the vehicle without openi
Mainte- nance Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life d performed the maintenan
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Vehicle Settings group a
283Continued
284
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
audio speakers sound. P. 159, 185
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass, Treble and SUBW*), -9 ~ C*1 ~ +9 (Fader and Balance), Off/Low/ Mid*1/High (SVC)
electable audio sources button is pressed.
f selectable audio udio is selected on the .
On/Off*1
r art display. On*1/Off
pairs a Bluetooth
th Audio device paired
ized items in the Audio lt. Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 284
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Audio Settings
Sound Adjusts the settings of the 2 Adjusting the Sound
Source Select Popup
Selects whether the list of s comes on when the AUDIO
Selects whether the list o sources comes on when A Function Change screen
Cover Art Turns on and off the cove
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device Connects, disconnects or Audio device to HFL.
Bluetooth Device List Edits or deletes a Bluetoo to HFL.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defau
Models with one display
Models with two displays
iPod, USB, Pandora* or AhaTM* mode
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM* mode
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM* mode
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
m Settings on P. 279 to P. 280
ized items in the Info t.
Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 285
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Info Settings
Clock/ Wall- paper type
Clock Type
See Syste Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defaul
285Continued
286
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
, connects or ne.
, edits or deletes a a security PIN.
eed dial entry.
transfer from your nter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
ically answer an four seconds.
On/Off*1
Fixed/Mobile Phone*1/Off
be automatically is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
on an incoming call On*1/Off
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 286
*1:Default Setting *2:Models with two displays
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Phone Settings
Connect Phone Pairs a new phone to HFL disconnects a paired pho
2 Phone Setup P. 320
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL paired phone, or creates
2 Phone Setup P. 320
Phone
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a sp 2 Speed Dial P. 331
Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically phone to HFL when you e
Auto Answer Sets whether to automat incoming call after about
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to imported when a phone
Use Contact Photo*2 Displays a callers picture screen.
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
ption Selectable Settings
-mail function on and On*1/Off
sage account.
alert comes on the a new text message/e- On/Off*1
atically read an -mail. mail is always read
mail is not read aloud. -mail is read aloud only
On/Off/Auto*1
ized items in the Phone lt.
Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 287
*1:Default Setting *2:Models with one display *3:Models with two displays
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Phone Settings
Text/ Message*2, Text/ Email*3
Enable Text Message*2, Enable Text/Email*3
Turns the text message/e off.
Select Account* Selects a mail or text mes
New Text Message Alert*2, New Text/Email Alert*3
Selects whether a pop-up screen when HFL receives mail.
Message Auto Reading
Sets the system to autom incoming text message/e On- A text message/e-
aloud. Off- A text message/e- Auto- A text message/e
when driving.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defau
287Continued* Not available on all models
288
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
atch display comes on signal lever to the On*1/Off
ence lines come on the On*1/Off
isplay settings.
ized items in the fault. Yes/No
guidelines come on the On*1/Off
mic guidelines come on On*1/Off
ized items in the Rear . Yes/No
ized items in the as default. Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 288
*1:Default Setting *2:Models with two displays
Setup Group Customizable Features Descri
Camera Settings
Lane- Watch*
Show with Turn Signal Select whether the LaneW when you move the turn passenger side.
Reference Lines Selects whether the refer LaneWatch monitor.
Display
Brightness
Adjusts the LaneWatch d
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default*2 Cancels/Resets all custom LaneWatch group as de
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed rear camera monitor.
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dyna the rear camera monitor.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Camera group as default
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Camera Settings group
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
1How to customize
To customize other features, rotate , move , , or , and press . 2 List of customizable options P. 296
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 289
How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the SETTINGS button, rotate to select a setting item, and press .
Models with navigation system
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
Continued 289
290
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 290
Customization flow Models with navigation system
Song by Voice Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Press the SETTINGS button.
Volume Voice Prompt
Message Auto Reading
Volume Interface Dial Feedback
Verbal Reminder
Brightness Contrast
Black Level
Bluetooth Status Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Default
Sound/ Beep
Display
System Settings
Bluetooth
Voice Rec
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
System Device Information Factory Data Reset
Background Color Header Clock Display
Clock Reset
Auto Time Zone*
Auto Daylight*
Clock
Clock Adjustment Clock Format
Units Language
Voice Command Tips
Wallpaper lock/Wallpaper
Type
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 291
Clock
Others
C
291Continued* Not available on all models
292
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Memory Position Link
Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto light Sensitivity
Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock
Maintenance Reset
tion
Setup*
Info.
Keyless Access Beep
m Setup
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 292
Default
TPMS Calibra
Vehicle Settings
Meter Setup
Driving Position
Keyless Access Setup
Lighting Setup
Door Setup
Maintenance
Driver Assist Syste
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Show with Turn Signal Reference Lines
Next Maneuver Pop up
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
Sound
Source Select Setup
Cover Art*1
ect Bluetooth Audio Device*1
Bluetooth Device List*1
Recording from CD*1
Recording Quality*1
HDD Info*1
ate Gracenote Album Info*1
Delete all HDD Data*1
Display Brightness Contrast
Black Level Color Tint
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 293
Default
Default
Default
Conn
Upd
Camera Settings
Rear Camera
LaneWatch
Audio Settings
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
293Continued
294
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Connect phone
Edit Bluetooth Device
Add Bluetooth Device
Bluetooth Device
List
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 294
Default
Phone
Default
Default
Text/Email
Phone Settings
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
Auto Daylight*
Clock Reset Info Screen Preference
Clock Format Auto Time Zone*
Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment
Manual.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 295
Clock
Default
Others
Info Settings
Navi Settings
See Navigation System
295Continued* Not available on all models
296
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 296
List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Display
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.
Sound/ Beep
Volume Changes the volume of the audio speakers.
Interface Dial Feedback Sets if and when the system reads aloud a selection made using the Interface Dial. On*1/Off/Auto
Message Auto Reading Selects whether the system automatically read out message, does not read, or read out only when driving.
On/Off/Auto*1
Verbal Reminder Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off
Blue- tooth
Bluetooth Status Turns the Bluetooth on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a paired phone, and create a security PIN.
2 Phone Setup P. 355
Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 357
Random/Fixed*1
Models with navigation system
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
e voice prompt.
n and off. On*1/Off
M on and off. V) P. 250
On*1/Off
d for music stored in
n P. 252
d for the phonebook. Modification P. 370
type. Analog/Digital*1/ Small Digital/Off
type. r a new wallpaper. r a wallpaper. 14
Blank/Galaxy*1/ Metallic
isplay from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
to automatically ving through different On*1/Off
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 297
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
System Settings
Voice Rec
Volume Changes the volume of th
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt o
Song by Voice Turns the Song By VoiceT
2 Song By VoiceTM (SB
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Modifies a voice comman the HDD or an iPod.
2 Phonetic Modificatio
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Modifies a voice comman 2 Phonebook Phonetic
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock Changes the clock display
Wallpaper
Changes the wallpaper Imports an image file fo Deletes an image file fo
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 2
Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock. 2 Clock P. 84
Clock Format Selects the digital clock d
Auto Time Zone* Sets the navigation system adjust the clock when dri time zones.
297Continued* Not available on all models
298
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
to automatically adjust or fall back by one ing time change occurs.
On*1/Off
ems in the Clock group.
t on the navigation map mile*1/km (U.S.) mile/km*1 (Canada)
uage. English*1/French/ Spanish
control of the system is ction while driving. Only lable.
On*1/Off
olor of the audio/ audio with touch screen.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Green
display comes on. On*1/Off
e information.
their factory default. ettings P. 308
ized items in the as default.
Default/OK
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 298
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
System Settings
Clock Auto Daylight*
Sets the navigation system the clock (spring ahead hour) when a daylight sav
Clock Reset Resets the settings of all it
Others
Units Changes the distance uni screen.
Language Changes the display lang
Voice Command Tips Alerts you when manual disabled to prevent distra voice commands are avai
Background Color Changes the background c information screen and the
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock
System Device Information Displays the system/Devic
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to 2 Defaulting All the S
Default Cancels /Resets all custom System Settings group
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
MS. Cancel*1/Calibrate
e FCW alerts, or turns Long/Normal*1/ Short/Off
eading by a few -5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
w to reset trip meter A, average speed A*, and
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
w to reset trip meter B, average speed B*, and
With Refuel/IGN Off/ Manually Reset*1
feature on and off. On*1/Off
start guidance when nge power mode.
On*1/Off
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 299
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Vehicle Settings
TPMS Calibration Cancels/Calibrates the TP
Driver Assist System Setup*
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes at which distanc FCW on and off.
Meter Setup
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature r degrees.
Trip A Reset Timing Changes the setting of ho average fuel economy A, elapsed time A*.
Trip B Reset Timing Changes the setting of ho average fuel economy B, elapsed time B*.
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Displays the push button conditions are met to cha
299Continued* Not available on all models
300
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
position to a stored On*1/Off
lock when you grab the Drivers Door Only*1/ All Doors
ts to blink when you On*1/Off
nd when you unlock/ On*1/Off
e the interior lights stay ors.
60seconds/ 30seconds*1/ 15seconds
e the exterior lights e driver's door.
60seconds/ 30seconds/ 15seconds*1/ 0seconds
e headlights to come Max/High/Mid*1/ Low/Min
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 300
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Vehicle Settings
Driving Position Setup*
Memory Position Link Changes the drivers seat setting.
Keyless Access Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors un drivers door handle.
Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior ligh unlock/lock the doors.
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sou lock the doors.
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time
Changes the length of tim on after you close the do
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of tim stay on after you close th
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for th on.
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
hen the doors With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift from P/Off
hen the doors
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off
door or both doors to f the remote.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
rior lights flash. eper sounds.
On*1/Off
for the doors to relock set after you unlock ng either door.
90seconds/ 60seconds/ 30seconds*1
isplay when you have ce service.
ized items in the s default.
Default/OK
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 301
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Vehicle Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for w automatically lock.
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for w automatically unlock.
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the driver's unlock on the first push o
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exte LOCK (2nd push)- The be
Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes and the security system to the vehicle without openi
Mainte- nance Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life d performed the maintenan
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Vehicle Settings group a
301Continued
302
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
atch display comes on signal lever to the On*1/Off
ence lines come on the On*1/Off
rection screen of the pts on the LaneWatch On*1/Off
isplay settings.
ized items in the fault. Default/OK
guidelines come on the On*1/Off
mic guidelines come on On*1/Off
ized items in the Rear . Default/OK
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 302
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Descri
Camera Settings
Lane- Watch
Show with Turn Signal Selects whether the LaneW when you move the turn passenger side.
Reference Lines Selects whether the refer LaneWatch monitor.
Next Maneuver Pop up Selects whether a turn di navigation system interru display.
Display
Brightness
Adjusts the LaneWatch d
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default Cancels/Resets all custom LaneWatch group as de
Rear Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed rear camera monitor.
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dyna the rear camera monitor.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Camera group as default
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
audio speakers sound. P. 216
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass, Treble and SUBW), -9 ~ C*1 ~ +9 (Fader and Balance), Off/Low/ Mid*1/High (SVC)
f selectable audio he AUDIO button is On/Off*1
r art display. On*1/Off
pairs a Bluetooth
th Audio device paired
s on music CDs are the HDD.
Auto/Manual*1
music files recorded to Standard*1/High
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 303
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Audio Settings
Sound Adjusts the settings of the 2 Adjusting the Sound
Source Select Popup Selects whether the list o sources comes on when t pressed.
Cover Art Turns on and off the cove
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device Connects, disconnects or Audio device to HFL.
Bluetooth Device List Edits or deletes a Bluetoo to HFL.
Recording from CD Selects whether the song automatically recorded to
Recording Quality Selects the quality of the the HDD.
CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod, USB, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
CD mode
CD mode
303Continued* Not available on all models
304
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
y.
lbum Info (Gracenote Update by USB*1/ Update by CD
ta P. 309
ized items in the Audio lt. Default/OK
, connects or ne.
, edits or deletes a a security PIN.
eed dial entry.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 304
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Audio Settings
HDD Info Displays the HDD capacit
Update Gracenote Album Info Updates the Gracenote A Media Database).
Delete all HDD Data 2 Deleting all HDD Da
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defau
Phone Settings
Phone
Connect phone Pairs a new phone to HFL disconnects a paired pho
2 Phone Setup P. 355
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL paired phone, or creates
2 Phone Setup P. 355
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a sp 2 Phone Setup P. 355
HDD mode
CD or HDD mode
HDD mode
uuCustomized Featuresu Featu
res
tion Selectable Settings
transfer from your nter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
cally answer an four seconds.
On/Off*1
Fixed/Mobile Phone*1/Off
be automatically s paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
on an incoming call On*1/Off
mail function on and On*1/Off
sage account.
alert comes on the a new text message/e- On/Off*1
ized items in the Phone t.
Yes/No
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 305
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descrip
Phone Settings
Phone
Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically phone to HFL when you e
Auto Answer Sets whether to automati incoming call after about
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to imported when a phone i
Use Contact Photo Displays a callers picture screen.
Text/ Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text message/e- off.
Select Account Selects a mail or text mes
New Text/Email Alert Selects whether a pop-up screen when HFL receives mail.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defaul
305Continued
306
uuCustomized Featuresu
Featu res
ption Selectable Settings
m Settings on P. 296 to P. 298.
g to be displayed when n. available menu items
le menu items pop up. u selected last time is
Info Top/Info Menu*1/Off
ized items in the Info lt.
Default/OK
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 306
*1:Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Descri
Info Settings
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper type
Clock
See Syste
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone*
Auto Daylight*
Clock Reset
Others Info Screen Preference
Selects any of the followin you press the INFO butto Info Top: Some of the
pop up. Info Menu: All availab Off: The menu item yo
displayed.
Default Cancels/Resets all custom Settings group as defau
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Featu
res
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset: Audio preset settings Phonebook entries Other display and each item settings.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 307
Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory Data Reset. u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes, then press to reset the settings.
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press again to reset the settings. u The confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
307
308
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Featu res
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset: Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
Route Preference Audio preset settings Phonebook entries Other display and each item settings.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 308
Defaulting All the Settings Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Move or to select Others. 4. Rotate to select Factory Data Reset,
then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate to select Yes, then press again to reset the settings. u The confirmation message will appear.
Press to select OK.
Models with navigation system
uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 309
Deleting all HDD Data Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button. 3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then
press . 4. Rotate to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press . u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Models with navigation system
309
310
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 310
HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
1HomeLink Universal Transceiver*
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.
Training HomeLink If you have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes. To do this: Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
Important Safety Precautions
Red Indicator
* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink Featu
res
1Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under Training a Button.
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for 2 secs, then remains on for about 23 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the devices instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 311
Training a Button
4.
a.3.
2.
5. a.
b.
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink button at the same time. Then, while continuing to hold the HomeLink button, press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
Training Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs, then remains on.
HomeLink LED is on.
YES NO
YES
YES NO NO
311
312
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 312
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be On. 2 Customized Features P. 272
Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, use the audio system's volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number. PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
HFL Buttons
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up Button
Volume down
Selector Knob
PHONE Button
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL Featu
res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 313
(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
To go to the Phone screen: 1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen. 2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
Models with two displays
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up Button
Volume down
Selector Knob
DISP Button
Continued 313
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
314
Featu res
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 314
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 331
HFL Status Display
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Callers Name
Callers Number
Disabled Options
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
usly paired phone with a
em. rom the system.
sly paired phone.
y PIN for a paired phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 315
HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.
Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then press .
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
Pair a phone to the system.
Replace a previo new phone.
Connect Phone*2
Bluetooth Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
Edit PIN
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect Connect a phone to the syst Disconnect a paired phone f
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
(Existing entry list)*2
Replace This Device
Delete This Device Delete a previou
Create a securit
Add Bluetooth
Device
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Pair a phone to the system.
315Continued
316
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.
Input
from tory
from ook
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
reviously stored speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
t Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.
te Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
nsfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
y answer an incoming call after about four
utomatically imported when a phone is paired to
an incoming call screen.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 316
Manual
New Entry Import Call His
Import Phoneb
Delete all of the p
*2: Models with two displays
Edi
Dele
(Existing entry list)
Delete All
Edit Speed Dial*1
Set calls to automatically tra vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automaticall seconds. Select the ring tone.
Automatic Phone Sync*1
Use Contact Photo*2
Set phonebook data to be a HFL.
Display a callers picture on
Phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
message/e-mail function on and off.
r text message account.
r a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL text message/e-mail.
m to automatically read an incoming text il.
p as default.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 317
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Turn the text
Select Account* Select a mail o
New Text Message Alert*2
New Text/Email Alert*3
Message Auto Reading
Select whethe receives a new
Sets the syste message/e-ma
Text Message*1, *2
Text/Email*1, *3
Default
Enable Text Message*2
Enable Text/Email*3
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings grou
*2: Models with one display *3: Models with two displays
317Continued* Not available on all models
318
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
nd missed calls.
e number from the call history to store as a mber. e number from the phonebook to store as a mber.
number to store as a speed dial number.
s speed dial list. e speed dial list.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 318
Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
1. Press the DISP button. 2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .
Models with one display
Models with two displays
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming a
Select a phon speed dial nu
Call History*1
Speed Dial*1
All
Manual Input
Dialed
Received Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Display the last 20 incoming calls.
New Entry
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phon speed dial nu
Enter a phone
More Speed Dials Display another paired phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.
Dial*1
Redial*1
Enter a phone number to dial. Redial the last number dialed in the phones history.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in th
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
See the previous message.age
e See the next message.
System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
age account.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 319
Text Message*1, *2
Text/Email*1, *3
Read/Stop
Select Account*
Previous Mess
Next Messag
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phones phonebook.
Message is read aloud.
Reply
Call
Select a message and press .
Select a mail or text mess
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with one display *3: Models with two displays
319Continued* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
320
Featu res
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting P. 330
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 320
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone screen. 2 Phone screen P. 318
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Phone Setup
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 321
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
321Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
322
Featu res
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 322
To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code. 3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
Edit Pairing Code
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial entries, call history, and security PIN information from the previously paired phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 323
To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a paired phone you want to replace, then press .
4. Rotate to select Replace This Device, then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches a new phone. u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Continued 323
324
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 324
To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete This Device, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 325
To turn on or off the text/e-mail function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
325Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
326
Featu res
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/e-mail is always read aloud. Off: A text message/e-mail is not read aloud. Auto: A text message/e-mail is read aloud only when driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 326
To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. On the Text Message screen, rotate to select New Text Message Alert, then press .
1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate to select New Text/Email Alert, then press
. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To set up the auto reading option 1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email
screen, rotate to select Message Auto Reading, then press . u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then press .
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 327
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List, then press .
3. Rotate to select a phone you want to add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press . 5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u
Rotate to select, then press . Press to delete. Press OK to enter the security PIN.
u
You can also enter a number using the icons.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
To Create a Security PIN
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen*
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen*
Continued 327* Not available on all models
328
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 328
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
Automatic Transferring
Auto Answer
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speaker. Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 329
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone. 3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
You can display a callers picture on an incoming call screen. 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Use
Contact Photo. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Ring Tone
Use Contact Photo
Models with two displays
Continued 329
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
330
Featu res
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 330
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say Call and the voice tag name.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 331
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 353
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New Entry.
3. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the linked cell
phones imported phonebook. 4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import from Phonebook, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
5. Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
Speed Dial
Mr.AAA 111AAA####
555EEE####
444DDD####
333CCC####
222BBB####
Mr.EEE
Mr.DDD
Mr.CCC
Mr.BBB
Select a method to store
Models with one display
Continued 331
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
332
Featu res
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 332
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press . 5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 333
To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press . 5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Phone, then press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press . 4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
333Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
334
Featu res
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say Call and the phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice tag.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 334
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
Making a Call
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 314 2 Speed Dial P. 331
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch screen for an alphabetical search.
Models with two displays
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 335
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Go to the Phone screen. 2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
3. Rotate to select a name, then press . u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then press .
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering letters.
4. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Models with one display
Models with two displays
Continued 335
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
336
Featu res
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 314 2 Speed Dial P. 331
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch screen to input numbers. Select numbers, then to start dialing.
Models with two displays
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 336
To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press
. 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using redial 1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
Models with one display
Models with one display
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 337
To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .
3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Audio/information screen
Models with one display
Continued 337
338
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 338
You can dial to the last six numbers in the call history. 1. Select . 2. Select Call History. 3. Select 1-6. u Dialing starts automatically.
Audio with touch screen*
* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired phones speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 331
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the corresponding preset buttons from the Phone screen.
Models with one display
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 339
To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone screen. 2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
You can dial to the first six numbers in the speed dial entries ( - ). 1. Select . 2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select 1-6. u Dialing starts automatically.
Audio/information screen
Models with one display
Audio with touch screen*
Continued 339* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
340
Featu res
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch screen instead of the and buttons.
Models with two displays
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 340
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.
Receiving a Call
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch screen.
Models with two displays
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 341
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.
Pres the MENU button to display the options.
The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.
Rotate to select the mute option, then press . u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Options During a Call
Mute Icon Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
Continued 341
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
342
Featu res
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/ e-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Text Message Alert or the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice P. 326
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 342
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
HFL can also display e-mails.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message or e-mail.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message, then press . u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press .
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
Models with two displays
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen. Rotate to select Select Account on the top of the list, then press .
You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time.
Message List
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 343
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen. 2 Phone Settings screen P. 315
2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select Account.
3. Rotate to select Text message or an e-mail account you want, then press .
Selecting a Mail Account
Models with two displays
Continued 343
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
344
Featu res
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, press on the text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message, then press .
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 344
Displaying text messages 1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 318
Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
2. Rotate to select Text Message, then press .
2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press .
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying Messages
Message List
Text Message
Models with one display
Models with one display
Models with two displays
All models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Displaying e-mails
Received text messages and e-mails may appear in the message list screen at the same time. In this case, text messages are titled No Subject.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 345
Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone screen. 2 Phone screen P. 318
2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press .
u Select account if necessary. 3. Rotate to select a folder, then press . 4. Rotate to select a message, then press
. u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Message List
Folder List Models with two displays
Continued 345
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
346
Featu res
1Using the Stop or Read option
This option changes to: Stop while the text message/e-mail is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read out.
Read when the system has finished reading out the text message/e-mail, or after you selected Stop. Select this option to hear the system read out the selected message.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 346
Using the Stop or Read option 1. Go to the text message or e-mail screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 344
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 347
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message or e-mail screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 344
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Reply, then press . 4. Rotate to select the reply message, then
press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
Continued 347
348
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 348
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying text messages P. 344
2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear on the screen.
3. Rotate to select Call, then press .
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 349
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528 -7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth Status setting must be On. 2 Customized Features P. 272
Voice control tips Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, use the audio system's volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles navigation system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Interface dial: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,
, or to select secondary menu.
HFL Buttons
Models with navigation system
Talk Button
Volume up
Microphone
Hang-up/Back Button
Pick-up Button
Volume down
Interface Dial
PHONE Button
349Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
350
Featu res
1Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 350
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 367
HFL Status Display
Limitations for Manual Operation
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Signal Strength
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Callers Name
Callers Number
Disabled Option
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Edit the user name of a paired phone.vice e
This ce
a paired phone from the system.
phone to the system.
e to the system.
IN Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a new phone.
This ce Delete a previously paired phone.
e to the system.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 351
HFL Menus The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
Phone Settings screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press .
Phone
Edit De Nam
Connect phone
Bluetooth Device List
(Existing entry list)
Replace Devi
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Connect a
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Disconnect
(Existing entry list)
Pair a phon
Edit P
Delete Devi
Add Bluetooth
Device Pair a phon
351Continued
352
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
nput
rom tory
rom ook
iously stored speed dial numbers.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
e
Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
sfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
answer an incoming call after about four
tomatically imported when a phone is paired to
n incoming call screen.
account.
l function on and off.
t comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
tems in the Phone Settings group as default.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 352
Text/Email*1
Manual I
Edit Speed Dial New Entry
Import f Call His
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Import f Phoneb
Delete All Delete all the prev
Edit
Delet
(Existing entry list)
Set calls to automatically tran vehicle.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Set whether to automatically seconds. Select the ring tone.
Use Contact Photo
Set phonebook data to be au HFL. Display a callers picture on a
Automatic Phone Sync
Select Account Select a mail or text message
Enable Text/Email Turn the text message/e-mai
New Text/Email Alert Select whether a pop-up aler text message/e-mail.
Cancel/Reset all customized iDefault
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
e number from the call history to store as a mber. e number from the phonebook to store as a
ber.
number to store as a speed dial number.
s speed dial list.
e speed dial list.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 353
Phone screen 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Select a phon speed dial nu
Speed Dial*1
Manual Input
New Entry Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phon speed dial num
Enter a phone
More Speed Dials Display another paired phone
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in th
Phonebook*1
Dial*1
Display the paired phones phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
353Continued
354
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
revious message.
ext message.
eads received message aloud, or stop message ng read.
a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
all to the sender.
mail or text message account.
nd missed calls.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 354
Text/Email*1
Message is read aloud.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
See the p
(Read/Stop)
Previous
Next See the n
System r from bei
Reply
Call
Reply to
Make a c
Select Account
Select a message and press .
Select a
Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phones history.
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming a Call History*1
All
Dialed
Received Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting P. 366
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 355
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
Phone Setup
Continued 355
356
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 356
To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Connect
Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/ information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 357
To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Pairing Code. 3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
Continued 357
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
358
Featu res
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial entries, call history, and security PIN information from the previously paired phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 358
To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List. 3. Rotate to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press . 4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,
then press . 5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone. u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 359
To delete a paired phone 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List. 3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,
then press . 5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen if it is successful.
359Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
360
Featu res
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 360
To turn on or off the text/e-mail function
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select New
Text/Email Alert. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press .
To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/e-mail is always read aloud. Off: A text message/e-mail is not read aloud. Auto: A text message/e-mail is read aloud only when driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 361
To set up the auto reading option 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Message
Auto Reading. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto, then press .
Continued 361
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
362
Featu res
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 362
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN. 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List. 3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press . 4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press . 5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u
Rotate to select, then press . Move to delete. Rotate to select OK to enter the security PIN.
u
You can also enter a number using the icons.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen in step
4.
To Create a Security PIN
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 363
Edit the user name of a paired phone as follows: 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List. 3. Rotate to select a phone you want to
edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Edit Device Name,
then press . 5. Enter a new name of the phone.
u
Rotate to select, then press . Move to delete. Rotate or move to select OK then press to enter the name.
u
You can also enter a name using the icons.
Editing User Name
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen
Audio/information screen
Audio with touch screen
363Continued
364
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 364
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds. 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer. 3. Rotate to select On, then press .
Automatic Transferring
Auto Answer
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker. Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the connected cell phone sounds from the speaker. Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 365
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone. 3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
You can display a callers picture on an incoming call screen. 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Use
Contact Photo. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Ring Tone
Use Contact Photo
Continued 365
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
366
Featu res
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 366
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync. 3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press
.
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say Call and the voice tag name.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 367
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry. 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press . From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the linked cell
phones imported phonebook. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import from Phonebook, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
Speed Dial
Continued 367
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
368
Featu res
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using home as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 368
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Record, then press . 5. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 369
To delete a voice tag 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Edit, then press . 4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press
. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Clear, then press . 5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
To delete a speed dial 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, rotate to
select Delete, then press . 4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
369Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
370
Featu res
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 370
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phones contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
To add a new voice tag 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press . 4. Rotate to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press .
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 371
5. Rotate to select New Voice Tag, then press .
6. Move or and rotate to select a contact name, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate to select Modify, then press . 8. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag. 9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select OK, then press .
371Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
372
Featu res
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 372
To modify a voice tag 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press . 4. Rotate to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then press .
5. Rotate to select a contact name you want to modify, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate to select Modify, then press . 7. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select OK, then press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 373
To delete a modified voice tag 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press . 4. Rotate to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press .
5. Rotate to select a contact name you want to delete, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate to select Delete, then press . 7. Move and rotate to select OK, then
press .
373Continued
374
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 374
To delete all modified voice tags 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select System Settings, then
press . 3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press . 4. Rotate to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then press .
u The contact name list appears. 5. Move and rotate to select Delete All,
then press . 6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
Connect phone
Connect phone
Phone#2
Phone#1
Phone#3
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say Call and the phonebook name, phone number, or stored voice tag.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 375
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
Making a Call
Continued 375
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
376
Featu res
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 350 2 Speed Dial P. 367
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch screen for an alphabetical search.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 376
To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press . 4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search. u You can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search. 5. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 350 2 Speed Dial P. 367
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch screen to input numbers. Select numbers, then to start dialing.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 377
To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press
. 5. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using redial 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued 377
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
378
Featu res
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the following:
: Dialed calls. : Received calls. : Missed calls.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another paired phones speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 367
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name or number can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 378
To make a call using the call history 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Call History, then
press . 4. Move or to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed. 5. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
. 4. Rotate to select a number, then press
. u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch screen instead of the and buttons.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 379
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call. Press the button to decline or end the call.
Receiving a Call
Continued 379
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
380
Featu res
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch screen.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 380
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu- driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone screen. Rotate to select the mute option, then press . u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Options During a Call
Mute Icon
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages and e-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message/e-mail feature. Only use the text message/ e-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text message or e-mail for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice P. 360
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 381
HFL can display newly received text messages and e-mails as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message or e-mail.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message, then press . u The text message or e-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press .
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
Continued 381
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
382
Featu res
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen. Move to select Select Account, then press .
You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 382
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then
press . u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account. 3. Rotate to select Text message or an
e-mail account you want, then press .
Selecting a Mail Account
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, move or on the text message screen.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 383
Displaying text messages 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press
. u Select account if necessary.
4. Rotate to select a message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying Messages
Message List
Text Message
Continued 383
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
384
Featu res
1Displaying e-mails
Received text messages and e-mails may appear in the message list screen at the same time. In this case, text messages are titled No subject.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 384
Displaying e-mails 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press
. 4. Rotate to select a folder, then press . 5. Rotate to select a message, then press
. u The e-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Folder List
Message List
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus Featu
res
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 385
Read or stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message or e-mail screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 383
2. Press to stop reading. Press again to start reading the message from the beginning.
Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message or e-mail screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 383
2. Move and rotate to select Reply, then press .
3. Rotate to select the reply message, then press . u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
Continued 385
386
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuHFL Menus
Featu res
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 386
Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud. 2 Displaying text messages P. 383
2. Move and rotate to select Call, then press .
John 0123456789####
Reply Call
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 387
Compass*
res
1Compass*
Compass operation can be affected under the following conditions: Driving near power lines or stations Crossing a bridge Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, press the BACK button to cancel the setting mode and return to the previous screen.
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass display appears.
Compass Calibration If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen. 3. Rotate to select Calibration, then press
. 4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press . 5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles. u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator goes off.
387* Not available on all models
388
uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection
Featu res
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in use, the display returns to normal after the calibration is completed.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 388
Compass Zone Selection 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold for five seconds. u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen. 3. Rotate to select Zone Adjust, then
press . u The display shows the current zone
number. 4. Rotate to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
2
3
4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12
13 14
15 Zone Map
Guam Island: Zone 8
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
* Not available on all m
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 389
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 390 Maximum Load Limit........................ 393
Towing a Trailer Towing Preparation.......................... 395 Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 397 Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 398
When Driving Starting the Engine .................. 399, 401 Precautions While Driving................. 405 Automatic Transmission/CVT............ 406 Shifting............................ 407, 411, 415 ECON Button ................................... 418
odels
Cruise Control ................................. 419 Forward Collision Warning (FCW)* .. 422 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* ..... 426 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............... 430 LaneWatchTM*.......................................... 432 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)... 434 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation ......... 436
Braking Brake System ................................... 438 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 440
Brake Assist System ......................... 441 Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 442 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 443 Rearview Camera ............................. 444 Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 445 How to Refuel ................................. 446
Fuel Economy Improving Fuel Economy.................. 447
Accessories and Modifications ........ 448
389
390
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 390
Before Driving
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.
Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving.
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components. Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 483
Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
Exterior Checks
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation D
rivin g
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 391
Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 393
Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking. Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving. If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94
Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125 2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 122
Interior Checks
Continued 391
392
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 392
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 66
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit D
rivin g
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.
2 Specifications P. 528, 530
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 528, 530
3WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 393
Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Label Example
393Continued
394
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 394
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight 550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load 850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 395
Towing a Trailer
rivin g
1Towing Load Limits
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale. If a public scale is not available, add the estimated weight of your cargo load to the weight of your trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the tongue load.
Break-in Period Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Never exceed the gross weight ratings. Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 528, 530
3WARNING Exceeding any load limit or improperly loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Towing Preparation
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
Total trailer weight Maximum allowable weight of the trailer, cargo, and everything in or on it must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in excess of this can seriously affect vehicle handling and performance and can damage the engine and drivetrain.
Tongue load The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded trailer on the hitch should be approximately 10% of the total trailer weight. Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little tongue load can make the trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear. Readjust the load as needed.
Towing Load Limits
Total Load
Tongue LoadTong
395Continued
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
396
D rivin
g
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/ territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other items are recommended or required for your towing situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type and brand. If a connector is required, it should only be installed by a qualified technician.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 396
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing, and where you are towing.
Hitches The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
Safety chains Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a potential hazard.
Additional towing equipment Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
Trailer light Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
Towing Equipment and Accessories
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer D
rivin g
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
Parking In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 397
Driving Safely with a Trailer
Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition. Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 395
Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer. Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving. Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly. Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
Drive slower than normal. Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal. Allow more time and distance for braking. Do not brake or turn suddenly.
Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Turning and Braking
Automatic transmission/CVT models
397Continued
398
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 398
Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 525
Driving in Hilly Terrain
Automatic transmission models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 399
When Driving
rivin g
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models without smart entry system
Brake Pedal
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models
399Continued
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
400
D rivin
g
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again. If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 400
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 438
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Starting to Drive Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently below -22F (-30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 401
Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P .
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot. u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models with smart entry system
Brake Pedal
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal Manual transmission models
401Continued
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
402
D rivin
g
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 510
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 402
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
All models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 403
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to (P. 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 438
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Stopping the Engine
Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
403Continued
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
404
D rivin
g
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 404
Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving D
rivin g
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.
NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 405
Precautions While Driving
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
In Rain
Other Precautions
405
406
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 406
Automatic Transmission/CVT
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Creeping
Kickdown
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 407
Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Reverse Used when reversing
Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral Used when idling
Release Button Drive (S) Used: For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
407Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
408
D rivin
g
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 408
Shift Lever Operation
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Tachometers red zone
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift indicator remains as 7.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7- speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal D driving mode.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 409
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.
When the shift lever is in (D : The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.
When the shift lever is in (S : The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometers red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator go off.
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Continued 409
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
410
D rivin
g
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1 to 2 15 mph (24 km/h) 2 to 3 25 mph (40 km/h) 3 to 4 40 mph (64 km/h) 4 to 5 47 mph (76 km/h) 5 to 6 52 mph (84 km/h) 6 to 7 57 mph (92 km/h)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 410
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed number)
Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number)
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures (-22F/-30C), there may be a short delay before the shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you are in the correct gear before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 411
Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift lever positions
Automatic transmission models
Reverse Used when reversing
Drive Used for: Normal driving (gears change between
1st and 6th automatically) Temporally driving in the sequential
mode
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Neutral Used when idling
Release Button Drive (S) Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at high speed)
Used when towing a trailer in hilly terrain
Used for driving in the sequential mode
411Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
412
D rivin
g
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometers red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 412
Shift Lever Operation
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
Tachometers red zone
M (Sequential Shift Mode) Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 413
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift mode.
When the shift lever is in (D : The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.
When the shift lever is in (S : The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode) indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.
If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shift up to 2nd gear. It does not shift automatically from 2nd through 6th gears.
You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.
When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D . When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position indicator go off.
Sequential Shift Mode
413Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
414
D rivin
g
1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear change. To change gear continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.
Recommended Shift Points Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel efficiency and reduce emissions.
The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable gear shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 3rd to 4th 40 mph (64 km/h) 4th to 5th 47 mph (76 km/h) 5th to 6th 53 mph (85 km/h)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 414
Second gear lock mode If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less, the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever from (S to (D.
Sequential Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)
Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to a lower gear)
Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to a higher gear)
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
1Shifting
NOTICE Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop. Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.
NOTICE Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel cold.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 415
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not grind.
Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
415Continued
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
416
D rivin
g
1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel economy and effective emissions control. The following shift points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 29 mph (46 km/h) 3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h) 4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h) 5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
Shift Up Normal Acceleration 1st to 2nd 17 mph (28 km/h) 2nd to 3rd 27 mph (44 km/h) 3rd to 4th 36 mph (58 km/h) 4th to 5th 41 mph (66 km/h) 5th to 6th 44 mph (71 km/h)
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 416
When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 417
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following: 1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R . 2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R . 4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Reverse Lockout
417
418
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 418
ECON Button The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control D
rivin g
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.
3WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
Manual transmission models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 419
Cruise Control Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
When to use
Shift positions for cruise control: In (D or (S
Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Vehicle speed for cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
How to use CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel. Cruise control is ready to use.
Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.
419Continued
420
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 420
Take your foot off the pedal and press the /SET button when you reach the desired speed.
The moment you release the /SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
To Set the Vehicle Speed
/SET Button
On when cruise control begins
Press and releaseOn
On
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control D
rivin g
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the /SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations: When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 421
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or /SET buttons on the steering wheel.
Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: Press the CANCEL button. Press the CRUISE button. Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
CRUISE Button
CANCEL Button
421
422
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
D rivin
g
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Important Safety Reminder FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW does not include a braking function. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 272
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning (LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 427
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 422
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Alerts you when it determines that there is a possibility that your vehicle may collide with a vehicle detected in front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts, including a heads-up warning that flashes on the windshield. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).
How the system works The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is above 10 mph (15 km/h).
LONG
NORMAL
SHORT
Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)* D
rivin g
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera's field of vision. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the FCW camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
1How the system works
The heads-up warning uses a lens located at the front end of the dashboard. Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
Lens
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 423
Beep
Camera-based system The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
The beeper sounds and the FCW indicator blinks until a possible collision is avoided.
Heads-up Warning Lights Flash twice.
Continued 423* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
424
D rivin
g
1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when windows are fogged.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the FCW system.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 424
Automatic shutoff FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on when: The temperature inside the system is high. The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)* D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 425
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
FCW Limitations
Condition
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly. The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a
tractor. When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle. When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.). A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle. An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. When the temperature inside the system is high. A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk). When the windshield is dirty or cloudy. When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours. When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned
out. When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. When your vehicle is towing a trailer.
425
426
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*
D rivin
g
1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations. Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 426
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected side lane markings.
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected left or right side lane markings without a turn signal activated, LDW will give audible and visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator blinks, letting you know that you need to take appropriate action.
How the System Works
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)* D
rivin g
1How the System Activates
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 74
1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera's field of vision. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the LDW camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 427
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: The vehicle is traveling between 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h). The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. The turn signals are off. The brake pedal is not depressed.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
How the System Activates
LDW Camera
LDW Camera
Continued 427
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*
428
D rivin
g
1LDW Camera
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears: Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when windows are fogged.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the LDW camera.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 428
Press the LDW button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.
LDW On and Off
LDW Button
Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)* D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 429
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
LDW Limitations
Condition
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.). A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle. An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. When the temperature inside the system is high. A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk). When the windshield is dirty or cloudy. When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. When your vehicle is towing a trailer. When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle. u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road. When the road has many repaired areas or erased lines. When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings. When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markings.
429
430
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
D rivin
g
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The VSA may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
VSA cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 430
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink.
VSA Operation
VSA System Indicator
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D
rivin g
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off.
When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or blinks, the VSA system comes on automatically. In this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 431
This button is on the driver side control panel. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the (VSA OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.
VSA On and Off
VSA OFF Indicator
431
432
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
D rivin
g
1LaneWatchTM*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: Your vehicles suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle. Your tires are over or under inflated. Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.
3WARNING Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 432
LaneWatchTM*
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passengers side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.
1 2
CameraAudio/Information Screen
Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side.
Press the LaneWatch button.
Pull the turn signal lever back.
Press the LaneWatch button again.
The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.
The system activates when you:
The system deactivates when you:
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM* D
rivin g
1LaneWatchTM*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.
For proper LaneWatch operation: The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind.
Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if: The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle.
The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 433
Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen. Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever. Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor. Next Maneuver Pop up*: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display. Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 272
Reference Lines Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 farther away.
2 3
1
433* Not available on all models
434
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
D rivin
g
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in: Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather. Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 483
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel. You drive on snowy or slippery roads. Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: A compact spare tire is used. There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.
Snow chains are used.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 434
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. Rotate the tires. Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS: Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 483
Make sure: The vehicle is at a complete stop.
The shift lever is in (N.
The shift lever is in (P.
The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
TPMS Calibration
Manual transmission models
Automatic transmission/CVT models
All models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D
rivin g
1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed.
The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/ information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 272
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 435
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice, indicating the calibration process has begun. If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions then press and hold the TPMS button again.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
TPMS Button
Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator
435
436
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 436
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 437
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
437
438
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 438
Braking
1Parking Brake
NOTICE Release the parking brake fully before driving. The rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking. To apply: Pull the lever fully up without pressing the release button.
To release: 1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button. 2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
Parking Brake
uuBrakinguBrake System D
rivin g
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 439
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 441 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 440
Foot Brake
439
440
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
D rivin
g
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use an incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking is not affected, there is a possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS: When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
When snow chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 440
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
ABS
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System D
rivin g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 441
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Brake Assist System
441
442
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 442
Parking Your Vehicle
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously. Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal. Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.
3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1 .
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 443
Multi-View Rear Camera
rivin g
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 272
Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the selector knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Models with two displays/Models with navigation system
Top Down View Mode
Normal View Mode
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
443
444
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 444
Rearview Camera
1About Your Rearview Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 272
Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.
About Your Rearview Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicles rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further than they actually are.
Rearview Camera Display Area
Models with one display
Bumper
Guidelines Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m) Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Camera
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 445
Refueling
rivin g
1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.
Fuel Information Fuel recommendation
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of todays advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
445
446
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
D rivin
g
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.
3WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 446
How to Refuel 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
2. Turn off the engine. 3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the drivers seat. u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 6. Insert the filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
Push
Cap
Cap
Holder
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 447
Fuel Economy
rivin g
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of fuel
Miles per Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
Improving Fuel Economy Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal. Maintain the specified tire pressure. Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
447
448
D rivin
g
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 448
Accessories and Modifications
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicles airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 522
Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 449
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 450 Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 451 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 452
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 453 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 457 Opening the Hood ........................... 459 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 461 Oil Check......................................... 462 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 464 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 465
Engine Coolant ................................ 467 Transmission Fluid............................ 469 Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 471 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 472
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 473 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades .......................................... 481
Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 483 Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 484 Tire Labeling .................................... 484 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......486 Wear Indicators................................ 488
Tire Service Life................................ 488 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 489 Tire Rotation.................................... 490 Winter Tires ..................................... 491
Battery............................................... 492 Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 493 Climate Control System Maintenance .. 495 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 496 Exterior Care.................................... 498
449
450
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 450
Before Performing Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are certified to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 455
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 539
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and inspection information.
Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
Periodic inspections Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 471
Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 483
Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 473
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 481
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance M
ain ten
an ce
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 451
Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off. Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts. Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
Maintenance Safety
Vehicle Safety
451
452
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 452
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 453
Maintenance MinderTM
ain ten
an ce
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)
100 100 to 91 90 90 to 81 80 80 to 71 70 70 to 61 60 60 to 51 50 50 to 41 40 40 to 31 30 30 to 21 20 20 to 16 15 15 to 11 10 10 to 6 5 5 to 1 0 0
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Displaying the Engine Oil Life
453Continued
454
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 454
To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life.
Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is switched.
The SERVICE message also starts to appear along with the engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes.
The engine oil has almost reached the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as possible.
The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display blinks.
The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM M
ain ten
an ce
1Maintenance Service Items
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
onditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). on (CVT) models s areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
quires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission 5,000 miles (40,000 km).
in very high temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C), in very low temperatures (under w a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Maintenance Sub Items te tires ace air cleaner element*2
ace dust and pollen filter*3
ct drive belt ace transmission fluid*4,*5
ace spark plugs ace timing belt and inspect water pump*6,*7
ct valve clearance ace engine coolant
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 455
Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance Minder MessageMaintenance
Minder Indicator
Sub ItemsMain Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items A Replace engine oil*1
B Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary Check parking brake adjustment Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Inspect suspension components Inspect driveshaft boots Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA) Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty c *3: If you drive primarily
from diesel-powered *4: Automatic transmissi *5: Driving in mountainou
temperatures. This re Maintenance Minder. fluid changed every 2
*6: 6-cylinder models *7: If you drive regularly
-20 F, -29 C), or to
CODE 1 Rota 2 Repl
Repl Inspe
3 Repl 4 Repl
Repl Inspe
5 Repl
455Continued
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
456
M ain
ten an
ce
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
You can reset the engine oil life display using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 272
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 456
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the (Select/Reset) knob. 3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds
or more. u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Resetting the Display
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 457
Maintenance Under the Hood
ain ten
an ce
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)
Battery
Manual transmission models
Maintenance Items Under the Hood 4-cylinder models
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange Handle)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
457Continued
458
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
M ain
ten an
ce
Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery
Clutch Fluid (Light Gray Cap)
Manual transmission models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 458
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange Handle)
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Radiator Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood M
ain ten
an ce
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 459
Opening the Hood 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center of the hood to release the lock mechanism, and open the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.
Hood Release Handle
Pull
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
4-cylinder models
459Continued
460
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 460
4. Lift the hood up most of the way. u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12 inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with your hands.
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil M
ain ten
an ce
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 461
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for the ambient temperature as shown.
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.
Genuine Honda Motor Oil Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Ambient Temperature
461
462
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
M ain
ten an
ce
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil being careful not to overfill.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 462
Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check M
ain ten
an ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 463
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Upper Mark Lower Mark
463
464
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
M ain
ten an
ce
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and engine damage.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 464
Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Engine Oil Fill Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter M
ain ten
an ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 465
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Drain Bolt
Washer
Drain Bolt
Washer
465Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
466
M ain
ten an
ce
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 466
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket. 7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque:
30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
29 lbfft (39 Nm, 4.0 kgfm) 8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
4.5 US qt (4.3 L) 9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine. 10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Oil Filter
Oil Filter
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant M
ain ten
an ce
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE If temperatures consistently below 22F (30C) are expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 467
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the engine coolant reservoir first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Check the amount of coolant in the engine coolant reservoir.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAX
MIN
467Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
468
M ain
ten an
ce
1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 468
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the coolant system. Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the engine coolant reservoir until it reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back on the engine coolant reservoir.
Radiator
Radiator Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid M
ain ten
an ce
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure. Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 469
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: HCF-2
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
4-cylinder models with automatic transmission (CVT)
4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission
469Continued
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
470
M ain
ten an
ce
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 470
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
6-cylinder models with automatic transmission
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid M
ain ten
an ce
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn clutch plate as soon as possible.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 471
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir
MIN
MAX
Checking the Clutch Fluid
Manual transmission models
Clutch Reservoir
MIN
MAX
471
472
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
M ain
ten an
ce
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 472
Refilling Window Washer Fluid Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level indicator comes on.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
Canadian models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 473
Replacing Light Bulbs
ain ten
an ce
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or while driving in the rain. This does not impact the exterior light function. However, if you see a large amount of water or ice accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the upper part of the air intake duct and the air intake tube.
1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: LED type*
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)*
High Beam Headlight
Tube
Holding Clip
Holding Clips
Driver side
6-cylinder models
Passenger side
All models
473Continued* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
474
M ain
ten an
ce
1High Beam Headlight
Press down the central pin until it clicks to unlock it.
Push the central pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert the clip into the hole and press on the central pin until it is flat.
Holding clip
Central pin
Push until the pin is flat.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 474
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab
CouplerBulb
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs M
ain ten
an ce
1Low Beam Headlights
Low beam headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Models with LED low beam headlights
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 475
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Low Beam Headlights Models with halogen low beam headlights
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
475
476
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
M ain
ten an
ce
1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 476
Fog Light Bulbs*
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light assembly out of the bumper.
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)
Screw
Tab
Coupler
Bulb
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs M
ain ten
an ce
1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the central pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Central pin
Push until the pin is flat.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 477
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the opposite side from the light being replaced. Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to the left. Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and pull the inner fender back.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. 4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs*
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
Holding Clip
Screw
Bulb
Socket
477* Not available on all models
478
uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 478
Parking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs Parking/daytime running light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Parking Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the upper part of the air intake duct and the air intake tube.
2 High Beam Headlight P. 473
1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir. 2 High Beam Headlight P. 473
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb.
Parking Light: 5 W
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Models with bulb type parking lights
Bulb
Socket
Tab
Coupler
Driver side
Passenger side
Both sides
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs M
ain ten
an ce
1Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.
Clip
Push until the pin is flat.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 479
Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the tabs on both sides.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it. 4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W Back-Up Light: 16 W Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) Rear Side Marker Light: 3CP
Holding Clip
TabsCargo Hook
Bulb
Socket
479
480
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 480
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs High-mount brake light bulbs are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Lens
Bulb
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 481
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
ain ten
an ce
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the windshield.
Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade from the wiper arm.
Tab
481Continued
482
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 482
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by pulling the tabbed end out.
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade. 6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab. 7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Top Retainer
Blade
Tab
Indent
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 483
Checking and Maintaining Tires
ain ten
an ce
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 434
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
3WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.
Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the drivers doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 488
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
483
484
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the drivers doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 215/55R17 94V 215: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 484
Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the drivers doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Tire Labeling The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Label Example
Example Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Size
Tire Sizes
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 485
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Glossary of Tire Terminology
485
486
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
M ain
ten an
ce
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 486
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) M
ain ten
an ce
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 487
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Traction
Temperature
487
488
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
M ain
ten an
ce
1Checking Tires
High speed driving We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size 215/55R17 94V 235/45R18 94V
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 488
Wear Indicators The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.
Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear Indicator mark
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement M
ain ten
an ce
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 489
Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist (VSA) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isnt possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.
489
490
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
M ain
ten an
ce
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 434
FRONT
Direction Mark
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 490
Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Front
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires M
ain ten
an ce
1Winter Tires
NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.
3WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 491
Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires: Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: Install them on the front tires only. Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Models with 235/45R18 tires
491
492
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 492
Battery
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Please consult a dealer for more information.
3WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
Checking the Battery Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
The battery condition is being monitored by the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is a problem with the sensor, the warning message on the information display will let you know. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 151
The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 84
The navigation system* is disabled. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.
* Not available on all models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 493
Remote Transmitter Care
ain ten
an ce
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.
Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips- head screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*
Screw Battery type: CR1620
Battery
493Continued* Not available on all models
494
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 494
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Smart Entry Remote*
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
* Not available on all models
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 495
Climate Control System Maintenance
ain ten
an ce
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
Dust and Pollen Filter The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
495
496
M ain
ten an
ce
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 496
Cleaning
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them off using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Opening
uuCleaninguInterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 497
The floor mats for the driver, and the rear passenger on the passengers side hook over the floor anchors, which keep the mats from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and 10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Floor Mats
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Front (driver side)
Rear (passenger side)
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
497* Not available on all models
498
uuCleaninguExterior Care
M ain
ten an
ce
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 498
Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: If driving on roads with road salt. If driving in coastal areas. If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment. Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
Washing the Vehicle
Using an Automated Car Wash
Using High Pressure Cleaners
uuCleaninguExterior Care M
ain ten
an ce
1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 499
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicles paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicles paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly. Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
Applying Wax
Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Cleaning the Window
Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
499
500
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 500
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 501
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools Types of Tools .................................. 502
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 503
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine........................ 509 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak..........................................510
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 511 Jump Starting.................................... 512 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 515
Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 516
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ............................................. 518
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 518
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 519
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On.................................. 520
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On............................520
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 521
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 522 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 524
Emergency Towing........................... 525
501
502
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 502
Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Types of Tools
Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle
Jack
Jack Handle BarTool Case
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 503
If a Tire Goes Flat
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
2. Move the shift lever to (R .
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
All models
503Continued
504
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 504
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Tool Case
Spare Tire
Wheel Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 505
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
505Continued
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
506
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (load) or may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: Do not use while the engine is running. Use only where the ground is firm and level. Use only at the jacking points. Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
3WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 506
1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
How to Set Up the Jack
Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 507
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)
Replacing the Flat Tire
Continued 507
uu If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
508
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Storing the Flat Tire
3WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 508
1. Remove the center cap. 2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well. 3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 434
Storing the Flat Tire
Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt
For compact spare tire
For full-size tire
TPMS and the Spare Tire
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 509
Engine Does Not Start
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
cklist
ess. at all
again.
g, the engine cannot be started.
dealer.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 512
Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Che Starter doesnt turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Check brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightn If the interior lights are dim or do not come on
2 Battery P. 492 If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 522
The starter turns over normally but the engine doesnt start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine
2 Starting the Engine P. 399
Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinkin
2 Immobilizer System P. 101
Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 79
Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 524
If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 525
509
510
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 510
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine wont start, start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the indicator stays on. u If you dont depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Emergency Engine Stop
NOTICE Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 511
Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for two seconds. Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice. The steering wheel will not lock.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P , and to ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF. Because turning off the engine also disables the power assist the engine provides
to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Downshift gears and use both feet on the brake pedal, if necessary, to slow the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.
Models with smart entry system
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
511
512
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 512
Jump Starting
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.
3WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal.
Jump Starting Procedure
Booster Battery
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Booster Battery
uuJump Startingu H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 513
4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Continued 513
514
uuJump Startingu
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 514
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
What to Do After the Engine Starts
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 515
Shift Lever Does Not Move
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat- tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Releasing the Lock
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Slot
Cover
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
Release Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
515
516
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 516
Overheating
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge needle at the mark may damage the engine.
3WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
H
How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses
power. Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
H
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.
3WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 517
Next thing to do 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature gauge needle comes down. u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the engine coolant
reservoir is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the engine coolant reservoir, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.
Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.
MAX
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MIN
517
518
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 518
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 519
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed.
What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off.
When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above.
Check Fuel Cap Message
519
520
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 520
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On Reasons for the indicator to come on The brake fluid is low. There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
uu Indicator, Coming On/Blinkingu If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 521
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
521
522
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 522
Fuses
Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working,
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Circuit Protected Amps 1 Battery 125 A
2
EPS 70 A Fuse Box Main 1 (60 A)
Fuse Box Option 1 (40 A)
ABS/VSA FSR 40 A ABS/VSA Motor 30 A
* Not available on all models
3
4 Front Fog Light* (15 A) 5 Horn 10 A 6 Stop Light 10 A 7 FI Sub 15 A 8 DRL (7.5 A) 9 IG Coil 15 A 10 Injector*2 20 A 11 Hazard 15 A
12
Fuse Box Main 2 60 A Fuse Box Option 2 (40 A)
IG Main 1 50 A
30 A*4
IG Main 2*4 30 A
Sub Fan Motor 20 A*2
30 A*3
Headlight Low Beam Main 30 A Fuse Box 30 A
Wiper Motor 30 A Main Fan Motor 30 A Starter Motor*4 30 A
13 Rear Defogger 40 A 14 Heater Motor 40 A 15 FI Main 15 A
Circuit Protected Amps
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:4-cylinder models *3:6-cylinder models *4:Models with smart entry system
16 Heated Door Mirror* (10 A) 17 MG Clutch 7.5 A 18 DBW 15 A 19 Small Light 20 A 20 Interior Light 7.5 A 21 Back Up 10 A 22 Audio 10 A 23 Fan Timer 7.5 A 24 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A 25 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A 26
Circuit Protected Amps
uuFusesuFuse Locations H
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 523
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Interior Fuse Box
Fuse Label
Circuit Protected Amps 1 A/C 7.5 A 2 DRL 7.5 A 3 4 5 Meter 7.5 A 6 SRS 7.5 A 7 Option* (7.5 A) 8 MISS SOL 10 A 9 Fuel Pump 20 A
* Not available on all models
10 ABS/VSA 7.5 A 11 12 Front Wiper 7.5 A 13 ACG 15 A
14 Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment) (20 A)
15 Drivers Power Seat
Reclining* (20 A)
16 Moonroof* (20 A) 17 Front Seat Heaters* (20 A) 18
19 Passenger Side Door
Unlock 10 A
20 Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock* 10 A
21 Drivers Door Lock 10 A 22 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A 23 Drivers Door Unlock 10 A 24 SRS 10 A 25 Illumination 10 A 26 Key Lock 7.5 A 27 Parking Lights 10 A 28 Lumbar Support* (10 A) 29 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A 30 Washer 15 A 31 SMART* (10 A) 32 Drivers Power Window 20 A
Circuit Protected Amps
33 Front Passengers Power
Window 20 A
34 Rear Driver Side Power
Window* 20 A
35 Rear Passenger Side Power
Window* 20 A
36 Drivers Power Seat Sliding* (20 A) 37 ACCESSORY 7.5 A 38 39 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
40 Accessory Power Socket
(Console Panel) 20 A
41 Driver Side Rear Door Lock* 10 A 42 Door Lock 20 A a Audio* (7.5 A) b ACM* (20 A) c Rear Seat Heaters* (15 A) d Premium Amp* (20 A) e f
g Passengers Power Seat
Reclining* (20 A)
h Passengers Power Seat
Sliding* (20 A)
Circuit Protected Amps
523
524
uuFusesu Inspecting and Changing Fuses
H an
d lin
g th
e U n
exp ected
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on P. 522 to 523.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 524
Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off. 2. Remove the fuse box cover. 3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
Fuse Puller
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 525
Emergency Towing
an d
lin g
th e U
n exp
ected
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.
525
526
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 526
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 527
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 528 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 532 Engine Number and Transmission Number...................................... 532
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 533 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 534
Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 535
Warranty Coverages ........................ 537 Authorized Manuals......................... 539 Customer Service Information......... 540
527
528
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 528
Specifications
Vehicle Specifications
*1: LX-S models *2: Except LX-S models *3: LX models *4: Except LX models
Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)*1
4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)*2
Canada: 1,900 kg*3
1,930 kg*4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2
Canada: 1,040 kg*3
1,055 kg*4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)*1
2,006 lbs (910 kg)*2
Canada: 890 kg*3
910 kg*4
Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
4-cylinder models
* Not available on all models
Engine Specifications
Fuel
Washer Fluid
Displacement 144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK DILKAR7G11GS DENSO DXE22HQR-D11S
Fuel: Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 )
Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11) Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3) Fog Lights* 35W (H8) Parking Lights 5W Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber) Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors) * LED
Brake/Taillights 21/5W Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
uuSpecificationsu In
fo rm
atio n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 529
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Automatic Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified HCF-2 Capacity Change 3.9 US qt (3.7 )
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
*1: Automatic transmission (CVT) models *2: Manual transmission models
Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.65 US gal (6.23 )*1
1.65 US gal (6.25 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the engine coolant reservoir)
Tire
Regular
Size 215/55R17 94V Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) Front 33 (225 [2.3]) Rear 33 (225 [2.3])
Compact Spare
Size T125/80D16 97M Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7 1/2J Compact Spare 16 x 4T
529Continued
530
uuSpecificationsu
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 530
Vehicle Specifications
*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models
Model Honda Accord Coupe No. of Passengers: Front 2 Rear 3 Total 5 Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)*1
4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*2
Canada: 1,990 kg*1
2,030 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)*1
2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2
Canada: 1,090 kg*1
1,145 kg*2
Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)
Canada: 910 kg Air Conditioning: Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Charge Quantity 15.0 16.8 oz (425 475 g) Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8
6-cylinder models
* Not available on all models
Engine Specifications
Fuel
Washer Fluid
Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11 DENSO SXU22HCR11
Fuel: Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 17.2 US gal (65 )
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ) Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 )
Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)*
LED*
Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3) Fog Lights 35W (H8) Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber) Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)
LED
Brake/Taillights 21/5W Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP Back-Up Lights 16W Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber) High-Mount Brake Light LED Rear License Plate Lights 5W Trunk Light 5W Interior Lights
Map Lights 8W Ceiling Light 8W Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W Courtesy Lights 2CP
uuSpecificationsu In
fo rm
atio n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 531
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Capacity Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity Change 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
*1: Manual transmission models *2: Automatic transmission models
Recommended Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) Change including filter
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.7 US gal (6.3 )*1
1.7 US gal (6.5 )*2 (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.64 ) in the engine coolant reservoir)
Tire
Regular
Size 235/45R18 94V Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
33 (225 [2.3])Front Rear 32 (220 [2.2])
Compact Spare
Size T125/80D16 97M Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 18 x 8J Compact Spare 16 x 4T
531
532
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 532
Identification Numbers
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the image below for the VIN locations.
Engine Number and Transmission Number See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number
Manual Transmission Number
Automatic Transmission (CVT) Number
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission Number
Manual Transmission Number
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 533
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
fo rm
atio n
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Audio System Bluetooth Audio Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Bluetooth Universal Transceiver Immobilizer System Keyless Access System Remote Transmitter
533
534
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 534
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 535
Emissions Testing
fo rm
atio n
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.
Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has Readiness Codes, as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for six hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40F and 95F (4C and 35C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
535Continued
536
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 536
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 537
Warranty Coverages
fo rm
atio n
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.
537Continued
538
uuWarranty Coveragesu
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 538
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 539
Authorized Manuals
fo rm
atio n
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners: Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
For U.S. Owners: Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
539
540
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 540
Customer Service Information
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information: Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) P. 532
Date of purchase Odometer reading of your vehicle Your name, address, and telephone number A detailed description of the problem Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners: American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners: Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands: Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: (787) 620-7546
uuCustomer Service Informationu In
fo rm
atio n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 541
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, visit www.gracenote.com. When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums. Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates a year. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at
Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)
www.honda.com (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in Canada). CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or
Gracenote END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non- commercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.
541Continued
542
uuCustomer Service Informationu
In fo
rm atio
n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 542
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error- free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. Gracenote 2009
Requirements to access Pandora Latest version of the Pandora application
installed on your mobile device. (Visit the Apple iTunes store or Google Play Marketplace to download the latest version.)
Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)
Connection to the internet via WiFi or cellular data network.
Android devices must be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.
Disclaimer of Pandora
uuCustomer Service Informationu In
fo rm
atio n
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 543
Limitations Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without notice
Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying songs, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.
Pandora is only available in the United States.
543
Index
544
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 544
Index
Operation ................................................ 410
A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 440 Accessories and Modifications ................. 448 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 138 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 467 Engine Oil................................................ 461 Washer.................................................... 472
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 461 Adjusting
Clock......................................................... 84 Front Seats .............................................. 125 Head Restraints........................................ 128 Mirrors .................................................... 123 Rear Seats................................................ 132 Steering Wheel ........................................ 122 Temperature.............................................. 82
AhaTM Radio ...................................... 203, 256 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) .................................................... 142 Changing the Mode ................................ 142 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 143
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 495 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 142 Sensor ..................................................... 145
Synchronized Mode................................. 144 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 142
Air Pressure............................... 484, 529, 531 Airbags ........................................................ 37
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43 After a Collision ........................................ 40 Airbag Care............................................... 49 Event Data Recorder.................................. 23 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40 Indicator.............................................. 47, 70 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 48 Sensors ..................................................... 37 Side Airbags .............................................. 44 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 46
AM/FM Radio............................ 161, 187, 226 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 440
Indicator.................................................... 69 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 153 Audio System............................................ 148
Adjusting the Sound................ 159, 185, 216 Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 150 Error Messages........................................ 262 General Information ................................ 268 HDD........................................................ 236 Internet Radio ......................... 169, 201, 254 iPod ........................................ 166, 197, 246 MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 171, 204, 257 Reactivating ............................................ 151 Recommended CDs................................. 269 Recommended Devices............................ 271 Remote Controls ..................................... 153
Security Code ......................................... 151 Theft Protection ...................................... 151 Touch Screen .................................. 177, 210 USB Flash Drives...................................... 271 USB Port ................................................. 149
Authorized Manuals ................................ 539 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 96
Customize ...................................... 283, 301 Automatic Lighting.................................. 114 Automatic Transmission
Creeping................................................. 406 Fluid ....................................................... 470 Kickdown ............................................... 406 Operating the Shift Lever .................. 17, 412 Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 515 Shifting................................................... 411
Automatic Transmission (CVT) Creeping................................................. 406 Fluid ....................................................... 469 Kickdown ............................................... 406 Operating the Shift Lever .................. 16, 408 Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 515 Shifting................................................... 407
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 150 Average Fuel Economy .............................. 81
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 545
B Battery ...................................................... 492
Charging System Indicator ................ 67, 518 Jump Starting ......................................... 512 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 492 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 493
Belts (Seat).................................................. 30 Beverage Holders ..................................... 137 Bluetooth Audio..................... 174, 207, 260 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ............ 312, 349 Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 61 Brake System ............................................ 438
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 440 Brake Assist System................................. 441 Fluid ....................................................... 471 Foot Brake .............................................. 439 Indicator ........................................... 66, 520 Parking Brake.......................................... 438
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 66 Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 66 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 118 Bulb Replacement .................................... 473
Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker Lights......................... 479
Fog Lights ............................................... 476 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 477 Headlights .............................................. 473 High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 480 Parking Lights ......................................... 478 Parking/Daytime Running Lights.............. 478
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 480 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... 477
Bulb Specifications ........................... 528, 530
C Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 62 Cargo Hooks ............................................. 139 Carrying Cargo.................................. 391, 393 CD Player ................................... 163, 194, 233 Center Pocket ........................................... 136 Certification Label .................................... 532 Changing Bulbs......................................... 473 Charging System Indicator ................. 67, 518 Child Safety ................................................. 50
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 100 Child Seat .................................................... 50
Booster Seats............................................. 61 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 52 Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 53 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.......................................................... 57
Larger Children.......................................... 60 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 52 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 54 Using a Tether ........................................... 59
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 498 Cleaning the Interior ................................ 496
Climate Control System............................ 142 Changing the Mode ................................ 142 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 143
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 495 Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 142 Sensors ................................................... 145 Synchronized Mode................................. 144 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 142
Clock............................................................ 84 Clutch Fluid............................................... 471 Coat Hook................................................. 139 Compact Spare Tire .................. 503, 529, 531 Compass .................................................... 387 Console Compartment ............................. 135 Controls....................................................... 83 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 467
Adding to the Engine Coolant Reservoir ............................................... 467
Adding to the Radiator............................ 468 Overheating ............................................ 516
Creeping (Automatic Transmission/ CVT) ......................................................... 406
Cruise Control........................................... 419 Indicator.................................................... 75
Cup Holders .............................................. 137 Customer Service Information................. 540 Customized Features................................ 272
545
546
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 546
D Daytime Running Lights........................... 116 Dead Battery ............................................. 512 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows.................................................. 143
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 533 Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 113 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 123
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 462 Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 113 Display Button .......................... 155, 180, 212 Door Mirrors ............................................. 124 Doors ........................................................... 86
Auto Door Locking .................................... 96 Auto Door Unlocking................................. 96 Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 29, 70 Keys .......................................................... 86 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside................................................. 94
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside.............................................. 89
Lockout Prevention System ........................ 93 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 486 Driving....................................................... 389
Automatic Transmission/CVT ................... 406 Braking.................................................... 438 Cruise Control ......................................... 419 Shifting Gear ................................... 411, 415 Shifting Position....................................... 407 Starting the Engine .......................... 399, 401
Driving Position Memory System ............ 120 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 495
E Eco Assist System .......................................... 7 ECON Button ............................................ 418 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 71, 520 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 430 Emergency ................................................ 525 Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 511 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 100 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 535 Engine ....................................................... 532
Coolant................................................... 467 Jump Starting.......................................... 512 Oil........................................................... 461 Starting ........................................... 399, 401 Switch Buzzer.......................................... 108
Engine Coolant ......................................... 467 Adding to the Engine Coolant Reservoir ............................................... 467
Adding to the Radiator............................ 468 Overheating ............................................ 516 Temperature Gauge .................................. 79
Engine Oil ................................................. 461 Adding.................................................... 464 Checking................................................. 462 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 453 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 518
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 461 ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 109 EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ........ 71 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) ................................................ 62
Expanded View Drivers Mirror ............... 124 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 498 Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 124
F Features .................................................... 147 Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 495 Oil .......................................................... 465
Flat Tire..................................................... 503 Floor Mats ................................................ 497 Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 470 Brake/Clutch ........................................... 471 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .................................................... 469
Engine Coolant ....................................... 467 Manual Transmission .............................. 469 Windshield Washer ................................. 472
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 72 Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 132 Foot Brake ................................................ 439 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 422 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 547
Front Seats................................................ 125 Adjusting ................................................ 125
Fuel ..................................................... 18, 445 Economy................................................. 447 Gauge ...................................................... 79 Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69 Range ....................................................... 82 Recommendation.................................... 445 Refueling ................................................ 445
Fuel Economy ........................................... 447 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 18, 446
Message ................................................. 519 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 18, 446 Fuses ......................................................... 522
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 524 Locations ........................................ 522, 523
G Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 447 Gauge ...................................................... 79 Information............................................. 445 Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69 Refueling ................................................ 445
Gauges ........................................................ 79 Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 411 Automatic Transmission (CVT)................. 407
Manual Transmission ............................... 416 Glass (care) ................................................ 499 Glove Box .................................................. 135
H Halogen Bulbs................................... 473, 476 Handling the Unexpected ........................ 501 HandsFreeLink (HFL) ....................... 312, 349
Auto Answer ................................... 328, 364 Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History .................................... 330, 366
Automatic Transferring.................... 328, 364 Displaying Messages ........................ 344, 383 Editing User Name................................... 363 HFL Buttons..................................... 312, 349 HFL Menus ...................................... 315, 351 HFL Status Display ........................... 314, 350 Limitations for Manual Operation .... 314, 350 Making a Call .................................. 334, 375 Options During a Call ...................... 341, 380 Phone Setup.................................... 320, 355 Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 370 Receiving a Call ............................... 340, 379 Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ...... 342, 381 Ring Tone........................................ 329, 365 Selecting a Mail Account ................. 343, 382 Speed Dial ....................................... 331, 367 To Create a Security PIN .................. 327, 362 To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options ......................................... 325, 360
Use Contact Photo .......................... 329, 365 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio................... 236 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2 Head Restraints ........................................ 128 Headlights................................................. 113
Aiming .................................................... 473 Automatic Operation............................... 114 Dimming......................................... 113, 116 Operating................................................ 113
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 141 HFL (HandsFreeLink)....................... 312, 349 High Beam Indicator .................................. 72 Hill Start Assist System ..................... 400, 404 HomeLink Universal Transceiver............ 310
I Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 532 Vehicle Identification ............................... 532
Ignition Switch ......................................... 108 Illumination Control
Knob....................................................... 118 Immobilizer System .................................. 101
Indicator.................................................... 72 Indicators .................................................... 66
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 69 Brake System (Amber) ............................... 66 Brake System (Red).................................... 66 Charging System............................... 67, 518 CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 75, 420
547
548
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 548
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 75, 419 Door and Trunk Open................................ 70 ECON Mode ...................................... 75, 418 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System............................................. 71, 520
Fog Light ................................................... 72 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 73 High Beam................................................. 72 Immobilizer System.................................... 72 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ................. 74 Light Control ............................................. 76 Lights On................................................... 72 Low Fuel.................................................... 69 Low Oil Pressure ................................ 67, 518 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 71, 434, 436 Maintenance Minder ......................... 75, 453 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 67, 519 Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 66, 520 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 31, 69 Security System Alarm ............................... 72 Smart Entry System.................................... 75 Starter System ........................................... 76 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 47, 70 Transmission.............................................. 69 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 71 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System............................................. 70, 430
VSA OFF .......................................... 70, 431 Washer Level ............................................. 75
Information............................................... 527 Information Display.................................... 80
Instant Fuel Economy ................................. 81 Instrument Panel ........................................ 65
Brightness Control................................... 118 Interface Dial ............................................ 209 Interior Lights ........................................... 133 Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 123
J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 506 Jump Starting ........................................... 512
K Key Number Tag......................................... 87 Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 93 Keys ............................................................. 86
Lockout Prevention.................................... 93 Master Keys .............................................. 86 Number Tag .............................................. 87 Remote Transmitter................................... 89 Types and Functions .................................. 86 Valet Key............................................. 87, 99 Wont Turn ............................................... 21
Kickdown (Automatic Transmission/ CVT) ......................................................... 406
L Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 426 LaneWatchTM............................................. 432
Language (HFL) ................................ 314, 350 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 55 Lights ................................................ 113, 473
Automatic............................................... 114 Bulb Replacement ................................... 473 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 116 Fog Lights ............................................... 115 High Beam Indicator ................................. 72 Interior.................................................... 133 Light Switches......................................... 113 Lights On Indicator.................................... 72 Turn Signals ............................................ 113
Load Limits ............................................... 393 Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 86
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................... 96 From Inside ............................................... 94 From Outside ............................................ 89 Keys.......................................................... 86 Using a Key............................................... 93
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 93 Low Battery Charge ................................. 518 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69 Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 67, 518 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength .................................................... 88
Lower Anchors ........................................... 55 Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 528, 530 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 393
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 549
M Maintenance ............................................ 449
Battery.................................................... 492 Brake/Clutch Fluid................................... 471 Cleaning ................................................. 496 Climate Control System .......................... 495 Coolant .................................................. 467 Maintenance MinderTM............................ 453 Oil .......................................................... 462 Precautions ............................................. 450 Radiator.................................................. 468 Remote Transmitter ................................ 493 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 473 Safety ..................................................... 451 Service Items........................................... 455 Tires........................................................ 483 Transmission Fluid................................... 469 Under the Hood...................................... 457
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 67, 519 Manual Transmission ............................... 415 Map Lights................................................ 134 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 393 Meters, Gauges .......................................... 79 Mirrors ...................................................... 123
Adjusting ................................................ 123 Door ....................................................... 124 Exterior ................................................... 124 Interior Rearview..................................... 123
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 448 Moonroof ................................................. 107 MP3................... 163, 171, 194, 204, 233, 257
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 443
N Numbers (Identification) .......................... 532
O Odometer.................................................... 81 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 461
Adding .................................................... 464 Checking................................................. 462 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 453 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 67, 518 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 461 Viscosity .................................................. 461
Opening/Closing Hood....................................................... 459 Moonroof................................................ 107 Power Windows ...................................... 104 Trunk ........................................................ 97
Outside Temperature Display .................... 82 Overheating .............................................. 516
P Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ...................................................... 409
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode) ...................................................... 413
Pandora ................................... 170, 202, 255 Panic Mode ............................................... 103
Parking...................................................... 442 Parking Brake ........................................... 438 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator............................................ 66, 520
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 48 Passing Indicators ..................................... 113 Power Windows ....................................... 104 Precautions While Driving ....................... 405
Rain ........................................................ 405 Pregnant Women ....................................... 35 Puncture (Tire).......................................... 503
R Radiator .................................................... 468 Radio (AM/FM) ......................... 161, 187, 226 Radio (XM) ...................................... 191, 230 Radio Data System (RDS) ......... 162, 189, 228 Range .......................................................... 82 RDS (Radio Data System) ......... 162, 189, 228 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 535 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button ..................................................... 119
Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 132 Rearview Camera ..................................... 444 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 123 Refueling .................................................. 445
Fuel Gauge................................................ 79 Gasoline.................................. 445, 528, 530 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69
Regulations............................... 436, 486, 533
549
550
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 550
Remote Transmitter.................................... 89 Replacement
Battery..................................................... 493 Bulbs ....................................................... 473 Fuses ............................................... 522, 523 Tires ........................................................ 489 Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 481
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 534 Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 81
S Safe Driving................................................. 25 Safety Check................................................ 29 Safety Labels ............................................... 63 Safety Message ........................................... 24 Seat Belts..................................................... 30
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 32 Checking ................................................... 36 Fastening................................................... 33 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.......................................................... 57
Pregnant Women ...................................... 35 Reminder................................................... 31 Warning Indicator................................ 31, 69
Seat Heaters .............................................. 141 Seats .......................................................... 125
Adjusting................................................. 125 Front Seats .............................................. 125 Rear Seats................................................ 132 Seat Heaters ............................................ 141
Security System ......................................... 101 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 72 Security System Alarm Indicator................. 72
Select Lever......................... 16, 407, 411, 415 Operation.......................... 16, 408, 412, 415 Releasing................................................. 515 Wont Move............................................ 515
Select/Reset Knob ....................................... 80 Selecting a Child Seat................................. 54 Selector Knob (Audio)...................... 154, 176 Sequential Shift Mode ............................. 413
Operation................................................ 414 Shift Lever........................... 16, 407, 411, 415 Shift Position Indicator .............. 68, 408, 412 Shifting (Transmission)............. 407, 411, 415 Side Airbags................................................ 44 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 46 Smart Entry with Push Button Start System ....................................................... 91
Snow Tires................................................. 491 Spare Tire.................................. 503, 529, 531 Spark Plugs ....................................... 528, 530 Specifications............................................ 528 Specified Fuel ........................... 445, 528, 530 Speedometer .............................................. 79 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 40 Starting the Engine .......................... 399, 401
Does Not Start......................................... 509 Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 108 Jump Starting.......................................... 512
Steering Wheel ........................................ 122 Adjusting ................................................ 122
Stopping ................................................... 442 Summer Tires............................................ 491 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 140 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 40 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ............................................ 2, 3, 108
SYNC Mode .............................................. 144
T Tachometer ................................................ 79 Temperature
Outside Temperature Display .................... 82 Temperature Sensor .......................... 82, 145 Time (Setting)............................................. 84 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..................................................... 434 Indicator ........................................... 71, 521
Tires .......................................................... 483 Air Pressure............................. 484, 529, 531 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 483 Inspection ............................................... 483 Labeling.................................................. 484 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 503 Regulations............................................. 486 Rotation.................................................. 490 Spare Tire ............................... 503, 529, 531 Summer.................................................. 491 Tire Chains.............................................. 491
In d
ex
14 ACCORD 2D-31T3L6100.book 551
Wear Indicators....................................... 488 Winter .................................................... 491
Tools ......................................................... 502 Towing a Trailer ....................................... 395
Equipment and Accessories..................... 396 Load Limits ............................................. 395
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 398 Emergency.............................................. 525
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System).................................................... 434 Indicator ........................................... 71, 521
Transmission............................. 407, 411, 415 Automatic............................................... 411 Automatic (CVT) ..................................... 407 Fluid ............................................... 469, 470 Manual ................................................... 415 Number .................................................. 532 Shift Lever Position Indicator ..... 68, 408, 412
Trip Meter .................................................. 81 Troubleshooting ...................................... 501
Blown Fuse ..................................... 522, 523 Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 21 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 22 Emergency Towing ................................. 525 Engine Wont Start ................................. 509 Noise When Braking ................................. 22 Overheating............................................ 516 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 503 Select Lever Wont Move ........................ 515 Warning Indicators.................................... 66
Trunk ........................................................... 97 Lid ............................................................. 97 Light Bulb........................................ 528, 530 Main Switch .............................................. 99
Turn Signals .............................................. 113 Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 71
U Unlocking the Doors .................................. 89 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside................................................... 11
USB Flash Drives........................................ 271 USB Port .................................................... 149 Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System ....................................................... 91
V Valet Key ............................................... 87, 99 Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 5 Vehicle Identification Number ................ 532 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) .................. 430
Off Button............................................... 431 Off Indicator .............................................. 70 System Indicator ........................................ 70
Ventilation ................................................ 142 Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 461, 529, 531 VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 430
W Warning and Information Messages......... 77 Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 518 Warning Labels........................................... 63 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately) .............................................. 537
Watts................................................. 528, 530 Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 488 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 506 Window Washers ..................................... 117
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 472 Switch..................................................... 117
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 104 Windshield................................................ 117
Cleaning ................................................. 499 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 143 Washer Fluid ........................................... 472 Wiper Blades ........................................... 481 Wipers and Washers................................ 117
Winter Tires .............................................. 491 Snow Tires .............................................. 491 Tire Chains .............................................. 491
Wipers and Washers................................. 117 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 481
WMA ................. 163, 171, 194, 204, 233, 257 Worn Tires ................................................ 483
X XM Radio ........................................ 191, 230
Related manuals for Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Accord Coupe Honda works, you can view and download the Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Honda Accord Coupe as well as other Honda manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Honda Accord Coupe. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Honda Accord Coupe 2014 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.